GETTING STARTED WITH

WINMAX MILL

Dual Screen and Max Consoles

November 2012 704-0116-115 Revision B

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not
represent a commitment on the part of Hurco Companies, Inc. (Hurco). The software
described in this document is furnished under the License Agreement to customers. It is
against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the
license agreement. The purchaser may make copies of the software for backup purposes.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, for any purpose without the
express written permission of the Hurco machine tool owner.

Hurco Manufacturing Company reserves the right to incorporate any modification or

improvements in machines and machine specifications which it considers necessary, and
does not assume any obligation to make any said changes in machines or equipment
previously sold.

Hurco products and services are subject to Hurco’s then current prices, terms, and
conditions, which are subject to change without notice.

© 2012 Hurco Companies, Inc. All rights reserved.

Patents: U.S. Patents B14,477,754; 5,453,933; Canadian Patent 1,102,434;

Japanese Patents 1,649,006 and 1,375,124; other Patents pending.

Hurco, Max, Ultimax, and WinMax are Registered Trademarks of Hurco Companies, Inc.

AutoCAD, Autodesk, and DXF are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.

MS-DOS, Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Many of the designations used by manufacturers and sellers to distinguish their products
are claimed as trademarks. Hurco has listed here all trademarks of which it is aware. For
more information about Hurco products and services, contact:

Hurco Companies, Inc.

One Technology Way
P.O. Box 68180
Indianapolis, IN 46268-0180
Tel (317) 293-5309 (products)
(317) 298-2635 (service)
Fax (317) 328-2812 (service)

For Hurco subsidiary contact information, go to Hurco’s Web site:

www.hurco.com

- ii Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Console Buttons and Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Programming and Operation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Using the On-screen Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Printing the Programming Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv

Machine and Console Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 1

Machine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2
Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 3
WinMax Interface Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 4
Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 4
Full Precision Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 5
Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 5
Drop-down Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 6
Expand and Collapse Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 6
Sorting and Resizing Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 7
Pop-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 7
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 8
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 8
On-screen Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 9
Accessing the WinMax Help in PDF format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 10
Control Panel Function Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 11
Emergency Stop Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 13
Programming Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 13
Text Screen Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 14
Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 14
Text Screen Cursor Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 14
Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 15
Optional Computer Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 15
Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 16
Override Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 16
Jog Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 17
Setting Jog Unit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 19
LCD Remote Jog Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 20
Enable Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 23
Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 24
Machine Operations Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 25
Machine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 25
Stop Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 25
Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 26
Tool Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 26
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 26
Communications Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 27
RS-232C Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 28
Indexer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 29
Network Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 29

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Table of Contents -iii

 USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 29
Automatic Tool Changers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 30
Loading a Tool into the Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 30
Unloading a Tool from the Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 30
Loading Tools into the ATC Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 31
Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 32
Large Tools in the ATC Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 32

Program Manager . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1
Managing Program Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1
Program Properties . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 4
Disk Operations . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 5
FTP Manager . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 6

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
WinMax Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
Machine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
Backup Config & Machine Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 3
Restore Config & Machine Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 3
User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 3
User Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 3
Conversational Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 6
NC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 7
Autosave Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 8
Tool Utilities and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 8
General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 8
Matching tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 8
Life Monitoring tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 10
Machine Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 11
Coolant Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 13
Coolant Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 14
Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 14
Alt Washdown Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 15
Alt Dwell Lt Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 16
Alt Washdown Off Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 17
Washdown On Delay Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 17
Washdown Off Delay Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 18
Examples for Coolant Parameters Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 19
Control Power Off Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20
Disable Tool Picker Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20
Enable Dual Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20
Cal to LS Velocity Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22
Auto Balance Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22
ATC and Rapid Override Disable Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22
ATC Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22
Rapid Override Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22
Axis Safety Position Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 23
Tilt Axis Safety Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 23
X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 23
ATC Z-Axis Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 24
ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 24
Aux Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 25
Aux Output 1, 2, 3, 4 Confirmation Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 25
Disable Aux Out 1, 2, 3, 4 During Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 25

- iv Table of Contents 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 26
Chip Conveyor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 26
Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 26
Chip Conveyor On Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 26
Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 26
Warm Up Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 29
Disable Auto On Chip Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 29
Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 29
Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 30
Dual Tool Probe Present . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 30
Enable Retract Z-Axis on Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 30
Estimated Run Time Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 31
Serial Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 32
FTP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33
WinMax Uptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33
Rotary Axes Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33
Select Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 34
Language Quick Toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 34
Data Logging Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 34
Tool Path Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 35
Additional Utilities Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 35
Printing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 35
Part Program Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 35
Tool Information Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 36
Probing Data Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 38
Serial Numbers Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 38
Integrator Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 38
Serial I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 39
Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 39
Active Error Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 39
Active Status Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 40
Error History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 40
Status History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 41
Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 41
Export Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 42

Programming Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 1
Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 2
Erase Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 2
Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 3
Part Setup Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 5
Machine Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 5
Unrotated Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 5
Workpiece Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 5
5-Axis Part Setup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 7
Part Setup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 9
Digital Read Out (DRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 11
Part Setup Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 12
Part Fixturing and Tool Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 13
Work Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 13
Auxiliary Work Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 14
Stock Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 15
Tool Calibration Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 17
Absolute Tool Length mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 17
Setup of Gauge Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 18

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Table of Contents -v

 Zero Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 20
Tool Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 21
Tool Setup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 21
Tool Setup Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 25
Advanced Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 27
Tool Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 28
Feed and Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 30
Feed and Speed Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 31
Speed Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 31
Feed Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 32
NC SFQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 32
Supplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 33
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 33
Edit Apt Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 33
Change Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 34
Part Program Tool Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 34
Part Program Tool Review for NC Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 35
Part Program Tool Review Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 36
Tool Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 37
Tool Matching Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 38
Tool Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 39
Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 39
Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 39
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 40
Tool and Material Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 41
Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 42
General Parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 43
General Parameters 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 44
Milling Parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 45
Milling Parameters 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48
Holes Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 50
Probing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 51
Performance Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 52
Import / Export Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 53
Conversational Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 53
NC States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 53
Importing NC States into Conversational Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 54
Import and Export Tool Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 55
Copy and Change Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 56
Copy, Move, or Delete Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 57
Modify Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 57
Changing Feeds, Speeds, and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 58
Change Surface Finish Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 58
Review Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 59
Manual Safety Override Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 61
CE Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 62
Entering the Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 63
Changing an Existing Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 63
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 64
Graphics Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 64
Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 64
Performance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 64
Axis Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 65
Toolpath and Solid Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 66

- vi Table of Contents 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine Operation Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1
Machine Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2
Calibrate Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2
Establishing Servo Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2
Axes Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2
Warm Up Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2
Reset Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 3
Recovery and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 3
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 4
Manual Function Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 4
Manual Rapid Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 5
Automatic Tool Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 7
VM Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 7
Types of Automatic Tool Changers (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 7
40-Taper ATC with 24- or 40-Station Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 7
ATC Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 7
50-Taper ATC with 30 or 32-Station Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 9
HMX and VTXU Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 10
HMX Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 10
VTXU Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 10
ATC and Machine Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 11
HMX Machine Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 11
HMX ATC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 12
HMX ATC Status Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 12
HMX ATC Diagnostics Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 13
VM, VMX, and VTXU ATC & Machine Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 14
ATC & Machine Diagnostics Input Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 15
VM, VMX, and VTXU ATC & Machine Diagnostics Softkeys . . . . . . .5 - 16
HMX Automatic Pallet Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 17
Squaring the Pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 17
Operating the APC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 18
APC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 19
APC Status Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 20
APC Diagnostics Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 20
APC Jog Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 21
Operating the APC from the Load Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 22
APC Panel Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 22
Manual APC Table Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 23
Dual-Zone Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 24
Part Programming for Dual-Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 24
Viewing Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 25
Dual-Zone Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 25
Setup Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 25
Running Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 26
Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 27
Auto Mode Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 29
Stop Machine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 31
Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 31
Park Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 32
Control Power Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 32
Restart Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 33
Shutdown Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 33

Record of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Table of Contents -vii

- viii Table of Contents 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1–1. Hurco Machine with the Dual-Screen Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -2
Figure 1–2. Dual-Screen and Single-Screen Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -3
Figure 1–3. Full Precision Editing Pop-up Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -5
Figure 1–4. Example of a drop-down list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -6
Figure 1–5. Example of Expand and Collapse Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -6
Figure 1–6. Example of Sorting and Resizing Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -7
Figure 1–7. Pop-up message example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -7
Figure 1–8. Pop-up showing minimize and close icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -7
Figure 1–9. Status Bar and other areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -8
Figure 1–10.Calculator pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -8
Figure 1–11.Dual-Screen Console Panel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Figure 1–12.Single-Screen Console Panel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12
Figure 1–13.Remote Jog Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17
Figure 1–14.Communications Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 27
Figure 1–15.Male 9-Pin D-Type Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 28

Figure 2–1. WinMax Program Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1

Figure 2–2. Load Program screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Figure 2–3. Disk Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5

Figure 3–1. Auxiliary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -1

Figure 3–2. Machine Parameters, Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -11
Figure 3–3. Machine Parameters, HMX (left) and VTXU (right), Page 2 . . . . . . . 3 - 20
Figure 3–4. Machine Parameters, Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Figure 3–5. Machine Parameters, Page 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27
Figure 3–6. Estimated Run Time Parameters for a horizontal milling machine . . 3 - 31
Figure 3–7. Language Selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34
Figure 3–8. Tool Information and Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36

Figure 4–1. Part Zero Relative to Machine Zero Viewed Looking Down at Table . 4 -3
Figure 4–2. Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 -4
Figure 4–3. Part Zero in Z (Tool Zero Calibration Plane) . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 -4
Figure 4–4. Part Setup Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 -6
Figure 4–5. 5-Axis Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 -8
Figure 4–6. Offset Z or Part Zero Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 10
Figure 4–7. Safety Work Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 11
Figure 4–8. Work Offsets on a dual-zone machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 14
Figure 4–9. Tool Measurement screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 18
Figure 4–10.Tool Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 28
Figure 4–11.Advanced Tool Settings: Feed and Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 30
Figure 4–12.Part Program Tool Review of a Conversational program . . . ..... . 4 - 34
Figure 4–13.Part Program Tool Review of an NC program . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 35
Figure 4–14.Tool Review showing Unknown tool in NC program . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 36
Figure 4–15.Tool Matching Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 38
Figure 4–16.Blend Offset and Blend Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 46
Figure 4–17.Cutter Compensation using the Insert Arc parameter . . . . . ..... . 4 - 47
Figure 4–18.Cutter Compensation using the Insert Line parameter . . . . ..... . 4 - 48
Figure 4–19.Program Review Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 59
Figure 4–20.CE Status & Diagnostics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 62
Figure 4–21.Solid graphic display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 66

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 List of Figures -ix

Figure 5–1. VMX 40-Taper ATC with 24-station Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -8
Figure 5–2. VMX 64/50-Taper, 32 Station ATC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -9
Figure 5–3. Machine Diagnostics Screen for HMX Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
Figure 5–4. HMX ATC Diagnostics Screen, Status Condition Fields . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
Figure 5–5. ATC & Machine Diagnostics Screen, Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Figure 5–6. Machine Function Screen with M Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
Figure 5–7. APC Diagnostics Screens 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
Figure 5–8. APC Diagnostic screen 1 with APC Jog Mode messages . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
Figure 5–9. APC Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22
Figure 5–10.Isometric view of parts in both zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Figure 5–11.Emergency Stop and Zone Confirmation buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Figure 5–12.Auto Mode screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
Figure 5–13.Auto Mode Monitoring screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30

- x List of Figures 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS
This documentation uses several conventions to explain the safety features and
emphasize key concepts. These conventions are described in this section.

Additional information is available on the machine’s Documentation CD.

WinMax Version

Current Machine Softkeys

Type (Desktop)

Prompts

Error/Status area

Status Bar

Console Buttons and Keys

References to console buttons and keys appear in bold text throughout the
documentation. For example, the Start Cycle button appears as the Start Cycle button
and the Manual key appears as the Manual console key in text.

Refer to the Getting Started with WinMax manual for information about console buttons
and keys, in addition to other information about using softkeys and the pop-up text entry
window.

Icons
This manual may contain the following icons:

Caution/Warning

The operator may be injured and the machine severely damaged if the
described procedure is not followed.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Documentation Conventions — xi

Important

Ensures proper operation of the machine and control.

Troubleshooting

? Steps that can be taken to solve potential problems.

Hints and Tricks

Useful suggestions that show creative uses of the WinMax features.

Where can we go from here?

Lists several possible options the operator can take.

Table of Contents
To assist with onscreen PDF viewing, this icon is located on the cover page.
Click the icon to access the Table of Contents (TOC).

You can also access many of the same TOC entries from the Adobe Reader
bookmarks located on the left side of the PDF page.

A - xii Documentation Conventions 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION
INFORMATION
Hurco provides documentation for using WinMax software on a control or desktop in two
formats: on-screen Help and PDF. The information contained in both formats is identical.

On-screen Help contains information about the current screen. If Help is not available for
a screen, a Welcome screen appears with access to the Table of Contents, Index, or
Search functions.

• To view the on-screen Help directly on a Hurco control, select the Help
console key.
• To view the on-screen Help on the desktop software, select the Help icon in
the menu bar.

PDF files are available on the hard drive. These files can be copied from the hard drive to
a USB memory device and transferred to a PC for viewing and printing.

Using the On-screen Help

On-screen Help provides information about using WinMax. The Help is context-sensitive
to the screen level. Press the console Help button to display the Help topic for the current
screen. The following list describes Help functions:

• Buttons in the upper left-hand corner of the Help screen are used to move
through Help topics and print screens.

• Use the Hide button to hide the navigation pane.

• Use the Back button to return to the previous Help screen.
• Use the Print button to print the current displayed Help topic, if a printer
is attached and configured. See Printing the Programming Manuals, on
page A - xiv for more information about printing.

• Use the arrow buttons to move between pages within a Help topic and to
move through topics.
• Use the Contents tab for a list of information sorted by subject:
1. Select the “+” to expand the topic and view sub-topics.
2. Select the topic to display it.

• Use the Index tab to show the Help index:

1. Quickly scroll to an index topic by typing the topic in the box at the top of
the index.
2. Select a topic and the Display button to view the topic.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming and Operation Information A-xiii
 • Use the Search tab to search the Help for a word or phrase:
1. Type the search word(s) into the text box at the top of the pane.
2. Select the List Topics button. A list of topics that contain the search word(s)
is displayed.
3. Select a topic and the Display button to view that topic.

• Use the Favorites tab to save Help topics for quick access:
1. Select the Add button at the bottom of the pane to add the current topic.
2. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Display button to view
it.
• Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Remove button to
remove it from the list.

Printing the Programming Manuals

The WinMax On-screen Help is also provided in PDF format for easy printing. The
information contained in the PDF files is identical to the on-screen Help. The PDF files may
be copied to a floppy disk or USB memory device to be transferred to a PC for printing.
Here are the steps to access the PDF files:

1. From the Input screen, select the PROGRAM MANAGER F8 softkey.

2. Select the DISK OPERATIONS F7 softkey.
3. In the left-hand pane, navigate through the folders:

• For WinMax Mill on a machine, the path is D:\Hurco\Winmax Mill\hlp.

• For WinMax Desktop on a PC, the path is C:\Program Files\Winmax
Mill\hlp.

The PDF files will appear in the right-hand pane.

The SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in User Interface Settings must be
set to YES (default is NO) in order to see the PDF files in the
directory. Access the SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in Auxiliary Mode,
Utilities/ User Preferences/ User Interface Settings.

4. Highlight the PDF file(s) in the right-hand pane, and select the COPY F2
softkey.
5. Ensure that your media is loaded (either a floppy disk in the disk drive or a USB
memory device in the USB port), and navigate to the proper location in the left-
hand pane of the DISK OPERATIONS screen (either the floppy drive A: or the
USB port E:). Highlight the desired location.
6. Place the cursor in the right-hand pane and select the PASTE F3 softkey to
paste the PDF file(s) to the desired location.

You may now remove your media and load the PDF file(s) onto a PC for printing.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming and Operation Information — xiv
Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 A-xv
A - xvi 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
MACHINE AND CONSOLE BASICS
These topics are discussed in this section:

Machine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
WinMax Interface Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
Control Panel Function Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Emergency Stop Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 13
Programming Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 13
Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Machine Operations Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 25
Communications Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 27
Automatic Tool Changers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 30

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-1
Machine Components
Before using the machine, you should become familiar with its components. Because of
European Committee (CE) requirements, Hurco machines sold in Europe differ somewhat
from those sold elsewhere. The figure below identifies some of the easily recognized
components of a machine. The console is in front of the machine, facing the operator’s
area.

1 Console

2 Way Cover

3 Table

4 Spindle

5 Power Drawbar

6 Spindle Motor

7 Z-Axis Servo

8 Column

9 Base

Figure 1–1. Hurco Machine with the Dual-Screen Console

Hurco machines are available with several hardware and software options. Information
about these options is available from Hurco or your Hurco Distributor.

1 - 2 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Consoles
The dual-screen and single-screen consoles use WinMax software:

Figure 1–2. Dual-Screen and Single-Screen Console

The console, and the electrical components required to operate it, are called the “control”
or the “CNC” (Computer Numeric Control). Some of the electrical components are built
into a separate enclosure kept in the machine’s electrical cabinet.

Some of the control’s internal components, such as disk drives and memory, are like
those in a PC. Disk operations, such as copying, deleting and storing files, are also
similar. The controller uses only the portions of the Windows® operating system that are
necessary to run Hurco CNCs. The operating system is XP Embedded, not the XP
distributed on general purpose PCs. Therefore, customers are not permitted to install
software on the WinMax controller.

The floppy drive is located on the console’s right side panel. To protect the drive from
debris, the protective floppy drive cover should be closed, except when inserting or
removing a diskette.

Information about options is available from Hurco or your Hurco distributor.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-3
WinMax Interface Environment
There are three ways to navigate and enter data for programming:

• Touchscreen—use the stylus or other pointing device to select softkeys and

drop-down lists for data entry and programming.
• Keyboard—use the function (F1-F12) keys and other keyboard shortcuts for
navigation and to call up screens.
• Ultimax classic edit mode—use the console keys; for example, use the
arrow keys for navigation and the enter key to accept data typed into a field.
See Edit Mode below for more information.

Edit Mode
Edit Mode is set in Utilities. Refer to User Interface Settings, on page 3 - 3. WinMax has
two edit modes:

• Ultimax Classic (default)—in this mode the console arrow keys are used to
move between blocks and segments, and the enter key is used to accept data
after it is typed into a field.
• Windows Dialog—in this mode the console arrow keys do not navigate
through fields and the enter key is not required to accept data typed into a
field.

If you want to... Ultimax Classic Windows Dialog

Enter data into a field Enter key to accept data Enter key to accept data
OR
Down (or Up) arrow to
accept data

Advance to next block Right/Left arrows Next Block/Previous Block

OR softkeys
Next Block/Previous Block OR
softkeys Page Up or Page Down key
OR
Page Up or Page Down key

Advance to next segment Right/Left arrows Next segment/hole softkeys

or operation OR OR
Next segment/hole softkeys Page Up or Page Down key
OR
Page Up or Page Down key

Navigate to next or Left or right arrow keys Page Up or Page Down keys
previous tool in Tool Setup

The right and left arrows will change the selection in fields with drop-
down lists (such as Tool Type in Tool Setup) in either Ultimax Classic
or Windows Dialog mode.

1 - 4 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Full Precision Editing
Numbers with decimals are rounded to the decimal display limit (three digits for metric
and four digits for imperial) when displayed in a field. Full Precision Editing allows you to
view the full number (up to 12 digits after the decimal) and/or to edit it to a more precise
point. With the cursor in a numeric decimal field, press F + decimal (.) on a machine, or
Ctrl + decimal (.) on the desktop to open a pop-up box containing the number.

Figure 1–3. Full Precision Editing Pop-up Box

Edit the number and select OK to save the changes. To close the pop-up box without
saving changes, select Cancel.

Do not use Full Precision Editing to change numbers that are

automatically calculated by WinMax. These numbers are calculated
to their 12-digit maximum accuracy and changing them could result
in changes to other automatic calculations in the program.

Softkeys
Softkeys appear as buttons on the screen; their default location is the right side of the
screen, but they can also be positioned on the left by changing the setting in User
Preferences (see Utilities, on page 3 - 1 for more information). Select a softkey using
one of these methods:

• On the screen, select the softkey.

• On the console, simultaneously press the F key and the number that
corresponds to the softkey (for example, F + 1 will select the F1 softkey). For
dual-console machines, ALT + the softkey number will select softkeys on the
graphics screen.
• On the keyboard (if using), press the corresponding function key (F1, F2, F3,
etc).

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-5
Drop-down Lists
Many fields contain a choice of items that are viewed by pulling down a list:

Touch the small

arrow to view a
drop-down list; use
arrow keys to
highlight choice
and Enter console
button to select

Figure 1–4. Example of a drop-down list

Expand and Collapse Files

In the Program Manager, files can be expanded or collapsed as follows:

Touch the “+” to expand

and view the files and
folders in a folder

Touch the “-” to collapse

(close) and hide the
files and folders in a
folder

Figure 1–5. Example of Expand and Collapse Files

1 - 6 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Sorting and Resizing Columns
On screens that contain columns, data in a column can be sorted ascending to
descending or descending to ascending by selecting the column heading. Columns can be
resized by dragging the column divider in the header.

Select and drag to resize column

Select to sort column

Figure 1–6. Example of Sorting and Resizing Columns

Pop-ups
During machine operation and programming, pop-up boxes may be displayed to convey
prompts or status messages. These pop-up boxes can be closed by selecting the
appropriate button (i.e., YES or NO or OK). Some pop-up boxes may only provide
informational messages and will be displayed for a few seconds before they automatically
close.

Figure 1–7. Pop-up message example

Certain pop-ups, such as the calculator and virtual keyboard, can be minimized by
selecting the “—” in the upper right corner. These pop-ups will remain open but are
“hidden” in the taskbar, and can be viewed again by touching the taskbar button. These
pop-ups can also be closed by touching the “X” in the upper right corner:

Minimize
Close

Figure 1–8. Pop-up showing minimize and close icons

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-7
Status Bar
The Status Bar appears at the bottom of every WinMax screen. It displays the program
name of the current active part program, a calculator icon, the current unit of measure
(inch or mm), the keyboard icon, and the current time. When viewed on a single screen
console, all icons appear in the same status bar; when viewed on a dual-screen console,
the program name and calculator icon appear on the left screen status bar, and the unit
of measure, keyboard icon and time appear on the right screen status bar.

• To use the calculator function, touch the calculator icon.

• To use the on-screen keyboard, touch the keyboard icon.
• To change the unit of measure, touch the unit of measure abbreviation.

WinMax Version

Softkeys

Prompts

Error/Status area

Status Bar

Figure 1–9. Status Bar and other areas

Calculator
Select the calculator icon in the Status Bar to open the calculator. The calculator appears
on screen and is operated using the stylus to select the calculator keys on screen.

Figure 1–10. Calculator pop-up

When the calculator is minimized (with “—” in the upper right), the last calculation is
retained, but when it is closed (with “X” in the upper right), the last calculation is erased.

1 - 8 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
On-screen Help
On-screen Help provides information about using WinMax. The Help is context-sensitive
to the screen level. Press the console Help button to display the Help topic for the current
screen. The following list describes Help functions:

• Buttons in the upper left-hand corner of the Help screen are used to move
through Help topics and print screens.
• Use the Hide button to hide the navigation pane.
• Use the Back button to return to the previous Help screen.
• Use the Print button to print the current displayed Help topic, if a printer
is attached and configured. See Accessing the WinMax Help in PDF
format, on page 1 - 10 for more information about printing.

• Use the arrow buttons to move between pages within a Help topic and to
move through topics.
• Use the Contents tab for a list of information sorted by subject:
1. Select the “+” to expand the topic and view sub-topics.
2. Select the topic to display it.
• Use the Index tab to show the Help index:
1. Quickly scroll to an index topic by typing the topic in the box at the top of
the index.
2. Select a topic and the Display button to view the topic.
• Use the Search tab to search the Help for a word or phrase:
1. Type the search word(s) into the text box at the top of the pane.
2. Select the List Topics button. A list of topics that contain the search
word(s) is displayed.
3. Select a topic and the Display button to view that topic.
• Use the Favorites tab to save Help topics for quick access:
1. Select the Add button at the bottom of the pane to add the current topic.
2. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Display button to view
it.
3. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Remove button to
remove it from the list.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-9
Accessing the WinMax Help in PDF format
The WinMax On-screen Help is also provided in PDF format for easy printing. The
information contained in the PDF files is identical to the on-screen Help. The PDF files
may be copied to a floppy disk or USB memory device to be transferred to a PC for
viewing or printing. Here are the steps to access the PDF files:

1. From the Input screen, select the PROGRAM MANAGER F8 softkey.

2. Select the DISK OPERATIONS F7 softkey.
3. In the left-hand pane, navigate through the folders:
• For WinMax Mill on a machine, the path is D:\Hurco\Winmax Mill\hlp
• For WinMax Desktop on a PC, the path is C:\Program Files\Winmax
Mill\hlp

The PDF files will appear in the right-hand pane.

The SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in User Interface Settings must be
set to YES (default is NO) in order to see the PDF files in the
directory. Access the SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in Auxiliary Mode,
Utilities/ User Preferences/ User Interface Settings.

4. Highlight the PDF file(s) in the right-hand pane, and select the COPY F2
softkey.
5. Ensure that your media is loaded (either a floppy disk in the disk drive or a
USB memory device in the USB port), and navigate to the proper location in
the left-hand pane of the DISK OPERATIONS screen (either the floppy drive A:
or the USB port E:). Highlight the desired location.
6. Place the cursor in the right-hand pane and select the PASTE F3 softkey to
paste the PDF file(s) to the desired location.
7. You may now remove your media and load the PDF file(s) onto a PC for
viewing and printing.

1 - 10 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Control Panel Function Groups
The buttons, keys, and knobs on the dual- and single-screen consoles are grouped by
their functions. Here are the control panel groups on a dual-screen console:

1 Touchscreen softkeys

2 Text screen

3 Graphics screen

4 Brightness control

5 Machine operation keys

6 Emergency stop

7 Trackball

8 Programming keyboard

9 Remote jog

10 Emergency stop

11 Axis, spindle, and machine control

12 Power on button

Figure 1–11. Dual-Screen Console Panel Groups

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-11
The dual-screen console also has a power on button, emergency stop button, and
brightness control thumbwheels for the Text screen and Graphics screen. Some consoles
are also equipped with contrast control thumbwheels.

Here are the control panel groups on a single-screen console:

1 Power On Button

2 Emergency Stop Button

3 Enable Button (operable with CE enabled)

4 Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control Dials

5 Machine Operation Keys

6 Console Jog Unit

7 USB Port

8 Programming Keyboard

Figure 1–12. Single-Screen Console Panel Groups

1 - 12 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Emergency Stop Buttons
There is an Emergency Stop button located on each console and one on the Remote Jog
Unit. Press the Emergency Stop button to stop all spindle and table motion. This button
locks down when pressed. To release it, twist the button in the direction indicated by the
arrows.

Learn the location of all Emergency Stop buttons on the machining

center before operating.

If the Emergency Stop button is pressed during execution of a part

program, the tool must be jogged clear of the part before resuming
operation.

When the Emergency Stop button is pressed, a special error file is created and saved to
the machine hard drive in a folder called NavESTOP. These files record the machine
conditions at the time the Emergency Stop button is pressed. These files can be retrieved
when necessary for service purposes; refer to Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page
3 - 41 for more information.

Programming Keyboard
Program a job at the machine while reading from a blueprint or program worksheet. The
prompts on the Text screen lead you through each element of a part program. Enter
machine operations, part dimensions, and other parameters by selecting the appropriate
screen softkeys and console buttons.

Set up and run part programs, and manage part program files using the following data
entry keys:

• Text Screen Data Entry

• Softkeys
• Numeric Keypad
• Pop-up Text Entry Window
• Graphics Screen Data Entry

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-13
Text Screen Data Entry
Text screen data entry keys are used for entering programming information into the Text
screen’s fields. These keys are located in the center of the console’s Programming
Keypad.

Programming Mode
Programming Mode console keys are named for the screens they activate:

• Input – displays the main programming screen used to create and edit part
programs. From this screen, access Part Setup, Tool Setup, Part
Programming, Program Parameters, Copy and Change Blocks, and Restore
and Erase menus.
• Auxiliary – accesses program storage management, system configuration
settings, DXF files, reset master, and the upgrade system files menus.
• Review – for Conversational programs, provides an outline view of the
blocks currently programmed, including type of block and tool used. Jump to
a desired block by typing the block number and pressing Enter. For Numerical
Control (NC) programs, the Review key displays or re-displays the NC part
program.
• Help – displays help text. Place the cursor on a field in question and press
the Help key. If help text is available, it will appear in a pop-up window. Help
is not available for all screens.

These keys function as they would on a standard PC keyboard:

• Insert - type over and replace current text.

• Delete - delete the character to the right of the cursor.
• Home - position the cursor before a line of text.
• End - position the cursor at the end of a line of text.
• Page Up - position the cursor at the beginning of the previous page.
• Page Down - position the cursor at the beginning of the next page.

Text Screen Cursor Control Keys

These keys control cursor movement and perform programming operations:

• Arrow keys - move the cursor from one field to the next, or advance a part
program to the next data block.

• Enter key () - accept the information typed in a text field, or move to the
next field.
• Special Function keys
• C console key - Use the C console and Clear keys to delete the value at the
current cursor position.
• Delete console key - Use the F console and Delete keys together to delete
the character to the left of the cursor.
• Arrow console key - Use the F console key in combination with the arrow keys
to quickly move the graphics cursor on the graphics screen.

1 - 14 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Numeric Keypad
The numeric keypad allows you to enter numbers and calculate values in the Text screen.
Perform the following operations with this keypad:

• Enter numeric data into fields on the screen.

• Perform calculations using the mathematical symbols (, , , ) on the
keypad.

Optional Computer Keyboard

If the console is equipped with an optional computer keyboard, use it to enter data into a
field. Press the Enter key to update a field and advance the cursor.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-15
Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control
The following keys and knobs are used to control machine movement and adjust the
spindle and axes.

Override Knobs
Three knobs on the upper console allow you to override the programmed axis feedrate,
rapid, and spindle speed.

The Override knobs function as follows:

• Axis Feed Rate - controls the programmed axis feedrate during an auto run
program. Turning the dial to counterclockwise slows the feedrate; turning the
dial to clockwise speeds the feedrate. Selecting Min slows the spindle to 10%
of the nominal value. Selecting Max increases the feedrate to 150% of the
nominal value.
• Spindle Speed - controls the spindle speed. Turning the dial
counterclockwise slows the spindle; turning the dial clockwise increases
spindle speed. Selecting Min slows spindle speed to 640 RPM slower than the
nominal value. Selecting Max increases spindle speed to 640 RPM faster than
the nominal value.
• Rapid Override - overrides the programmed rapid traverse; the speed at
which the table moves from one point to another. Selecting Min slows the
table speed to 10% of the nominal value. Selecting Max increases the table
speed to 150% of the nominal value.

1 - 16 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Jog Unit
Use the Jog Unit to manually jog the axes. The Console Jog Unit is on the Max console.
The hand-held Remote Jog Unit can be removed from the console and carried closer to
the work piece.

1 Emergency Stop Button

2 Store Position Key

3 Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys

4 Jog Hand Wheel

5 Jog Feed Keys

6 Jog Feed Override

7 Axis Select Switch

Figure 1–13. Remote Jog Unit

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-17
Both the Console Jog Unit and the Remote Jog Unit function the same:

1. Select an axis with the Axis Select Switch.

2. Use the Jog Feed Keys:
a. Select either the + or – Jog Feed Keys.
b. Adjust Jog Feed Override to override the programmed axis feedrate.

OR

3. Use the Hand Wheel Multiplier:

a. Select a hand wheel resolution with one of the Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys.
b. Rotate the Jog Hand Wheel.
Other than the Emergency Stop button, the Jog Unit does not affect
running programs.

The dials on a Jog Unit are defined as follows:

• Axis Select Switch – select the axis to jog (0, X, Y, Z, A, B).

• Jog Feed Override – control the jog speed (10% to 150%) of the nominal
value. Use this dial to touch off the tool and move the X and Y axes to touch
off the part for Tool and Part Setup.
• Jog Feed Keys - select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction.
• Jog Hand Wheel - select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction.
• Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys - define the hand wheel resolution.
• x1 - defines a one-to-one ratio (each click equals .0001 inch, or .00254
mm).
• x10 - defines a 10-to-one ratio (each click equals .001 inch, or .0254
mm).
• x100 - defines a 100-to-one ratio (each click equals 0.01 inch, or .254
mm. One full turn equals 1 inch, or 25.4 mm).

• Store Position Key - record the axis’ current position in the part program’s
setup screens.
• Enable button—must be held down to use the +/- jog buttons. See Enable
Button, on page 1 - 23 for more information.
See Setting Jog Unit Parameters, on page 1 - 19 for instructions on
setting the Jog Unit parameters.

1 - 18 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Use a Jog Unit to manually jog the axes:

1. Select an axis with the Axis Select Switch.

2. Use the Jog Feed Keys:
a. Jog axis direction by select either + or – .
b. Use the Jog Feed Override to override the programmed axis feedrate.

OR

Use the Hand Wheel Multiplier:

a. Select a hand wheel resolution with one of the Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys
b. Rotate the Jog Hand Wheel to jog axis direction.

Setting Jog Unit Parameters

To access the parameters :

1. Press the Manual Mode console key to display the Manual screen.
2. Press the Manual Function (F2) softkey. The Jog Unit parameters are
displayed:
• Manual Jog Feed - enter the desired manual jog axis feedrate. The
range is from 0.0 to the machine’s maximum feedrate.

An axis may have a maximum jog feedrate slower than other axes. This
slower axis can only move at its maximum jog feedrate (and not the
higher feedrate of other axes).

For example, the X and Y axes on a machine each have a maximum jog
feedrate of 787 inches per minute (ipm). The Z axis has a maximum jog
feedrate of 100 ipm. Without using the jog feedrate override, the X and Y
axes can jog at 787 ipm , but the Z axis is limited at 100 ipm.

• Manual Spindle Speed - enter the spindle speed when the Spindle On
console key is pressed. This value can not be greater than the machine’s
maximum spindle speed. Entering a negative value (e.g., -500) causes
the spindle to reverse (turn counterclockwise) at that speed.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-19
LCD Remote Jog Unit
The hand-held LCD Remote Jog Unit is designed to be removed from the console and
carried closer to the work piece. Use it to manually jog the axes and access Manual
mode, Part and Tool Setup, and Work Offsets.

1 LCD Display Screen 9 Start Cycle

2 Motion Hold button 10 Cursor Control buttons (up, down, left, right)

3 Stop Cycle button 11 Cursor Control button (select)

4 Emergency Stop button 12 Jog Hand Wheel

5 Enable button 13 Jog Feed keys

6 Store Position key 14 Hand Wheel Multiplier keys

7 Mode Selector buttons 15 Jog Feed Override

8 Interrupt Cycle 16 Axis Select switch

1 - 20 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
The LCD Remote Jog Unit consists of:

• Motion Hold button—stops all axes movement (except a tap operation)

when the tool is in the programmed feedrate region. Pressing the button a
second time allows machine positioning to resume.
• Stop Cycle button—stops axes movement, then stops the spindle.
• Emergency Stop button—stops all spindle and table motion. See
Emergency Stop Buttons, on page 1 - 13 for more information.
• Enable button—on machines with CE enabled, must be held to use the Start
Cycle button and the +/- jog on the unit. See Enable Button, on page 1 - 23
for more information.
• Store Position key—records the axis’ current position in the part program’s
setup screens.
• LCD screen— displays Manual mode (MAN), Part Setup (PSU), Tool Setup
(TSU), Work Offsets (WO), and Aux Work Offsets (AWO).

Mode Selector buttons positioned under the LCD screen are used to select
the corresponding mode. The cursor control buttons are used to scroll up,
down, left, and right, and to select items on the LCD display.

These are the modes that can be selected:

• MAN—selects manual mode. The display shows machine or part positions

for X, Y, and Z. Positions are zone relative on dual-zone machines.
Pressing the cursor control down button will scroll the display to show
additional axes (if present). The display scrolls up or down one line at a
time using the cursor control buttons.

• PSU—selects Part Setup. The display shows current part setup

information. Values for X, Y, Z, A, B, C, as well as rotary centerline X,
rotary centerline Y, and Z table offset are shown. Positions are zone
relative on dual-zone machines. The display scrolls up or down one line at
a time using the cursor control buttons.

• TSU—selects Tool Setup. The display shows current tool setup

information. The up and down cursor control buttons scroll though the
tool setup information. The left and right cursor control buttons scroll
between tools. The initial tool displayed is the current tool in spindle.

• WO—selects Work Offsets. The displays shows G54, G55, G56, G57, G58,
G59 and Shift values. The cursor control buttons scroll up or down
through the offsets.

• AWO—selects Aux Work Offsets. The display shows offsets 1-93. The
cursor control buttons scroll up or down through the offsets.

• Jog Hand Wheel - select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction.
• Jog Feed Keys - select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction.
• Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys - defines the hand wheel resolution.
• x1 - defines a one-to-one ratio (each click equals .0001 inch, or .00254
mm).
• x10 - defines a 10-to-one ratio (each click equals .001 inch, or .0254

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-21
 mm).
• x100 - defines a 100-to-one ratio (each click equal s 0.01 inch, or .254
mm. One full turn equals 1 inch, or 25.4 mm).
• Jog Feed Override – controls the jog speed (10% to 150%) of the nominal
value. Use this dial to touch off the tool and move the X and Y axes to touch
off the part for Tool and Part Setup.
• Axis Select Switch – selects the axis to jog (0, X, Y, Z, A, B).
See Setting Jog Unit Parameters, on page 1 - 19 for instructions on
setting the Jog Unit parameters.

Basic function of the LCD Remote Jog Unit is as follows:

1. Select an axis with the Axis Select Switch.

2. Use the Jog Feed Keys:
a. Select either the + or – Jog Feed Keys.
b. Adjust Jog Feed Override to override the programmed axis feedrate.

OR

3. Use the Hand Wheel Multiplier:

a. Select a hand wheel resolution with one of the Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys.
b. Rotate the Jog Hand Wheel.

1 - 22 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Enable Button
The LCD Remote Jog, standard Remote Jog, single-screen and dual-screen consoles may
be equipped with an Enable button. The Enable button is functional only on machines
that have CE enabled.

The Enable button has three positions: fully up (off), middle (on), and fully down (off).
The button must be in the middle position to be enabled. The Enable button is required
for the following operations:

• Start Cycle (on LCD Remote Jog only)—press and hold the Enable button
and press the Start Cycle button on the unit. The Enable button can be
released after the cycle is started.

Both the Enable button and the Start Cycle button must be held
down to run the spindle with the enclosure doors open.

It is not necessary to use the Enable button when using the Start Cycle
button on the console.

• +/- Jog—press and hold the Enable button while simultaneously selecting
either “+” or “-” button to jog the selected axis, only when the enclosure
doors are open. If the enclosure doors are closed, it is not necessary to use
the Enable button to jog the axes.

It is not necessary to press and hold the Enable button to jog the axis using
the hand wheel at x1, x10, or x100 speeds.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-23
Machine Control
Machine Control buttons start and stop machine operation. The buttons function as
follows:

• Power On - enables the relay control system. This button must be

illuminated to operate the machine, but may be switched off while creating or
editing a part program.
• Start Cycle - activates machine operation. When the machine is in an active
mode, the Start Cycle flashes to indicate the machine is ready. When this
button is pressed again, the light switches off.

To turn Control Power On:

1. Press the Power On console button.

2. Press the Manual Mode console key.
3. Press the Start Cycle console button.
Never press the Start Cycle button without knowing exactly what the
machine will do.

• Stop Cycle - stops axes movement, then stops the spindle.

• Feed Hold (Motion Hold on Max console) - stops all axes movement,
except a tap operation, when the tool is in the programmed feedrate region.
Pressing the button a second time allows machine positioning to resume.

To Stop an Automatic Machine Operation:

Press the Stop Cycle button to stop the axis, then the spindle.

Or

1. Press the Feed Hold (or Motion Hold) console button to stop axis motion.
2. Press the Spindle Off console key to stop the spindle.
3. Press the Feed Hold (or Motion Hold) console button again.

1 - 24 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Machine Operations Keys
The Machine Operations console keys are needed to run part programs and control the
machine during cutting. These keys are labeled under the Machine Mode, Spindle, Tool
Changer, and Coolant groupings.

Machine Mode
The Machine Mode console keys have these functions:

• Auto - allows you to run a part program automatically. See Auto Mode, on
page 5 - 27 for more information.
• Interrupt - halts machine operation during automatic execution of a
program to allow manual functions, such as cleaning the work piece. See
Stop Motion, on page 1 - 25 for more information. Press Auto or Single to
resume the part program and most cycles that were manually started by the
operator (such as Chip Auger or Conveyor).
• Single - provides access to the Single Cycle screen. In this mode, the
machine stops the axes after each automatic operation. In Conversational
Programming the machine halts (with the spindle running) after each hole
operation, contour segment, or milling subroutine. For NC Programming, the
machine halts with the spindle running after each data block is executed.
Pressing the flashing Start Cycle button causes the automatic machining
operation to resume. For information on the Single Cycle screen softkeys, see
the Auto Mode, on page 5 - 27 section. The softkeys are the same on both
screens.
• Test - provides access to perform a program test run to identify potential
problems before cutting the part. For more information, see Auto Mode, on
page 5 - 27.
• Manual - provides access to manual machine operations that allow axis
positioning with the jog unit. See Manual Safety Override Mode, on page 4 -
61 for more information.

Stop Motion
If you observe a problem during the cutting process or simply want to stop the machine
to make some adjustments, you may press one of three buttons to stop motion:

• Feed Hold—stops all axes movement (except a tapping operation in

progress), when the tool is in the programmed feedrate region. Pressing the
button a second time allows machine positioning to resume without loss of
position, provided no other button or key has been pressed.
• Interrupt Cycle—halts machine operation during automatic execution of a
program to allow manual functions such as cleaning the work piece. Pressing
the Interrupt button performs the following actions:
1. Stops all motion except the spindle.
2. Pulls the tool straight up and out of the part.
3. Stops the spindle.
4. Displays the manual screen on the console.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-25
To restart the part program, press the Auto button followed by the Start Cycle button.

If any key other than the Auto button is pressed to restart the
program, the system cancels the execution of the part program.

• Emergency Stop—all motion stops and power is shut off to the spindle,
relay control, and servo systems. An emergency stop message with recovery
instructions appears at the bottom of the text screen. To release an
Emergency Stop button, twist the button in the direction indicated by the
arrows and pull the button up.
After the last choice is selected, the following sequence occurs:

1. A prompt is displayed to press the Start button while the

console Start Cycle button flashes.
2. When the Start Cycle button is pressed, the program
begins running at the specified point of the Start Block.
3. When the specified End Block is reached, the display
indicates that Recovery Restart mode is complete and the
Start Cycle button flashes again.
4. If the Start Cycle button is pressed again, then the
program will rerun using the same Start and End Blocks.

Spindle
• On—activates the spindle if the machine is in manual mode. The Start Cycle
button must also be pushed to start spindle rotation.
• Off—stops spindle rotation during manual operation if the Spindle On button
was previously pressed.

Tool Changer
• Auto—activates the automatic tool changing function. When selected, all
operator-initiated tool changes will be automatic.
• Manual—activates the manual tool changing function. When selected, all
tools must be manually inserted into or removed from the spindle; bypassing
the automatic tool changer.

Coolant
• Auto—activates the selected coolant to spray whenever the tool is below the
Retract Clearance plane. The coolant turns off when the tool moves above
the Retract Clearance plane, or during a tool change. This key cannot be
activated in Manual mode. Pressing this key a second time turns off the
coolant operation.
• Primary—functions only on machines equipped with a primary (i.e., flood)
coolant system. Activates the primary coolant system when the machine is in
Auto or Manual mode, and overrides an Coolant Auto operation. Pressing the
Primary key a second time turns off this operation.

1 - 26 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
 • Secondary—functions only on machines equipped with a secondary coolant
system (e.g., Coolant Through Spindle, CTS). Activates the secondary coolant
system when the machine is in Auto or Manual mode and overrides Coolant
Auto operation. Pressing the Secondary key a second time turns off this
operation.

Communications Panel
All communication ports are located on the Comm Port panel assembly on machine
control cabinet. The following connectors are available:

Port Connector Type Use

10-base T RJ45 Network (Ethernet)

Indexer 8-pin military Indexer

PORT 1 and Port 2 9-pin RS-232C Serial Communications

USB USB jump drive Not available for use.

The communication ports are typically arranged as follows:

Figure 1–14. Communications Panel

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-27
RS-232C Serial Port
The RS-232C serial ports can be used to connect peripherals to the machine. These ports
may be addressed separately. The standard baud rates are software-selectable. The ports
can be used as an output or input, depending upon the software.

The connector pin designated for the RS-232C signal is shown below:

Figure 1–15. Male 9-Pin D-Type Connector

While the signals present at the serial port conforms to the RS-232C standard, not all
standard RS-232C signals are available. Some peripheral devices may provide RS-232C
control signals that are not available at the port described here. However, such devices
can usually be adapted to the port. In some cases, it may be necessary to add jumpers to
the connector. Signals available at the serial port are:

Pin Signal Name Signal on the Pin

1 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Not used by the control.
Receive Data (RXD) Data received (by machine) in serial format from
2
peripheral device.
Transmit Data (TXD) Data transmitted (by machine) to peripheral
3
device in serial format.
4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Not used by the control.
Signal Ground (SG) Line establishing the common ground reference
5
potential for all interface lines.
Data Set Ready (DSR) Signal to notify printer that transmitter is ready
6
for transmission.
Request to Send (RTS) Line used by control to instruct peripheral device
to get ready to receive data. Data can be
7
transmitted after the Clear-To-Send signal is
received from connected peripheral device.
Clear to Send (CTS) Control line used by peripheral device to indicate
8
that it is ready to receive data from machine.
Ring Indicator (RI) Signal indicates modem has received the ring of
9
an incoming call.

To connect a peripheral to the machine, fabricate an adapter cable. If a properly shielded

low capacitance cable is used, cable lengths of up to 100 feet are permissible.

Be certain that you use the correct cabling before connecting the device to the machine.
Consult the peripheral manual to determine whether the peripheral is a Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) or Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. The Hurco machine is
a DTE device, and in most cases, so is a personal computer. A printer may be either a
DTE or DCE device.

1 - 28 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Indexer Port
Indexing signals are always present at the Indexer port, so there is no need to turn it on.
It is the customer’s responsibility to provide a harness from the Indexer to the Indexer
port. Before making this harness, see the Parts Listing and Diagrams Manual for the
correct pin-outs.

Network Port
The 10baseT (RJ45) connector is used with the Ultinet option. This option requires an
ethernet card, cabling from the ethernet card to the communications panel, and an
optikey diskette to enable the option.

USB Port
The USB Port (Universal Serial Bus) is a high-speed port that allows you to connect
devices, such as printers and jump drives to the panel. You can use a jump drive to
transfer files.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-29
Automatic Tool Changers
Hurco machining centers use either a Swing-Arm Random Pocket Automatic Tool Changer
(ATC) or a Horizontal Chain Type ATC. Both types of ATCs function essentially the same.

Each tool is inserted into a tool holder before being loaded into the spindle. The
orientation hole in the tool holder must always line up with the orientation key in the tool
changer. Tool changer stations are numbered to identify and locate each tool.

Only use tools that are dimensioned for the maximum spindle speed.

Loading a Tool into the Spindle

Use this procedure to manually load a tool into the spindle:

1. Press the Machine Mode Manual console key to prevent the ATC from moving
while you insert a tool. The Manual screen appears.
2. Touch the Orient Spindle softkey to position the spindle for tool insertion. If
there is a tool in the spindle, refer to Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine,
on page 1 - 32.
On some machines the Y-axis moves to the front of the machine for
manual tool changes.

3. Insert the tool holder into the spindle. Make sure the tool holder slots align
with the spindle head guides.
4. Release the Spindle Unclamp button to secure the tool in the spindle. Be
certain that the tool is firmly seated.
5. Touch the Tool In Spindle softkey. The Tool In Spindle field appears.
6. Make sure the tool number in the Tool In Spindle field matches the number of
the tool in the spindle. If the numbers do not match, enter the correct tool
number.
7. To load a tool into the ATC magazine, see the Loading Tools into the ATC
Magazine, on page 1 - 31 section.

Unloading a Tool from the Spindle

To manually remove a tool from the spindle, follow these steps:

1. Press the Manual Mode console key. The Manual screen appears.
2. Hold the tool to prevent it from dropping.
3. Press the Spindle Unclamp button. The spindle unclamp button is either on the
side of the spindle, or the front of the spindle. Refer to Parts Listing and Wiring
Diagrams Manual for your machine for a drawing showing the Spindle Unclamp
button location.
4. The tool disengages. Pull the tool out of the spindle.
5. Release the Spindle Unclamp button when the tool is free.

1 - 30 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Loading Tools into the ATC Magazine
The ATC takes a tool from the spindle and automatically loads it into the magazine, if
space allows. The tool’s location in the magazine is recorded in the ATC Map (the
Horizontal Chain Type ATC does not use an ATC Map). Before loading a tool into the ATC
magazine, the Servo power must be On, and the machine must be calibrated.

Do not manually load tools directly into the magazine.

To load the tool currently in the spindle into the ATC magazine:

1. Press the Manual Mode console key.

2. Select the Tool Management softkey. The Spindle tab displays the Tool in
Spindle, Next Tool, and ATC Map (Swing-Arm Random Pocket ATC only) fields
appear.
3. Verify that the Tool In Spindle value matches the tool currently in the spindle.
If the numbers do not match, enter the correct tool number.
4. Enter the same tool number into the Next Tool field.
5. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key.
6. Enter a new tool number into the Next Tool field. The ATC Map field must be
Auto.
7. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key. The Start Cycle light begins flashing.
8. Clear the tool changer and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle
button. The Tool In Spindle field will be updated to the next tool value.
• If the Next Tool is an Auto tool, it was placed into the magazine when the
previous tool was removed from the spindle.
• If the Next Tool is a Manual tool, you will be prompted to insert it into the
spindle.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-31
Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine
Remove tools from the ATC magazine by following these steps:

1. Press the Manual Mode console key.

2. Select the Tool Management softkey to display the Tool in Spindle. If there is
no tool in the spindle, set the Tool In Spindle field to 0 (zero).
The ATC Map field will indicate if the tool selected is in the magazine,
and its location.

3. Enter the tool number (of the tool you want to remove in the magazine) into
the Next Tool field.
4. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key to move the Next Tool into the
spindle.
5. Clear the tool changer area and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle
button to initiate the tool change.
6. Press the Spindle Unclamp button and manually remove the tool from the
spindle.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6, as needed, to remove additional tools from the ATC
magazine.

Large Tools in the ATC Magazine

A part program may require tools with large diameters. These tools can be manually
loaded by the operator, or automatically loaded.

The ATC magazine capacity is reduced by half for tools larger than 80
mm (125 mm for some machines).

Follow these steps to load large tools into the ATC magazine:

1. Touch the ATC Map softkey from the Spindle screen. The ATC Map appears.
2. Touch the Max. Tool Dia. More than XX mm softkey.
3. An “ATC Map will be cleared! Are you sure you want to change Max. Tool
Diameter to more than XX mm?” message appears.
Each time you switch between large and small tools, the entire ATC
Map will be cleared and the magazine must be reloaded.

4. Select the Yes softkey. The ATC Map will clear, then reappear. Only the odd
numbered tool pockets will be available.
5. Reload tools into the magazine using the “Loading a Tool into the Spindle”
section.
6. Return to the default setting of Maximum Tool Diameter XX mm or Less by
using the previous procedure and touching the Max. Tool Dia. XX mm or Less
softkey.

1 - 32 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
PROGRAM MANAGER
These topics are discussed in this section:

Managing Program Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1

Program Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4
Disk Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
FTP Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6

Managing Program Files

Program Manager shows all part programs that are in the control’s memory to edit or run.
Use the Program Manager menu to create, open, save, and close programs. Features of
the Program Manager include:

• Ability to load more than one program at a time.

• Ability to load Conversational and NC programs at the same time.
• Ability to copy blocks from one program into another (blocks are copied in
Program Review; Program Manager is used to switch between programs to
facilitate copy and paste).

Program in use lock

Unsaved programs
Program storage location

List of programs

Snapshot of part

File type
and description

Figure 2–1. WinMax Program Manager

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Program Manager 2-1

 Sort the program list by Program Name or Path by selecting the
corresponding header. Select the Program Name header once to sort
the list alphabetically. Select the Program Name header again and
sort the list in reverse alphabetical order.

Program Manager softkeys are:

• NEW F1—creates a new part program. Choose the program type by selecting
one of these softkeys:
• CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAM F1—creates a new conversational part
program.
• NC PROGRAM F2—creates a new NC part program (extensions for NC
part programs are determined by the NC dialect set in User Preferences.
The .NC extension is also supported.).

WinMax gives new programs the default name NONAME (for

example, NONAME1.HWM). When new programs are created, they
should be renamed with a suitable name and be saved to the hard
drive or other media.

• OPEN F2—opens a part program that is saved to the hard drive, network
drive, floppy disk, or USB memory device. The Load Program screen opens,
where you can locate the program from the list, as in the following example:

3. Select to
open
1. Select folder

2. Select
program
file

Figure 2–2. Load Program screen

To find a program, navigate through the folders in the left pane by selecting
“+” or “-” to expand or collapse. Select a folder to view its contents in the
right pane.

• Load F1—opens an HWM file or an XML1 file.

• Import F2—opens an HD3 file.

2 - 2 Program Manager 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 HD3 and XML1 files will be listed with .HWM extension in Program
Manager. HWM is Hurco’s conversational program file type. SAVE AS
must be used to resave the program as HD3. Using SAVE will save
the program with the HWM extension. Programs cannot be saved
with the XML1 extension.
Sort the program list by File, Size, or Date by selecting the
corresponding header. Programs with the same date will be sorted
alphabetically.

Select the File header once to sort the list alphabetically. Select the
File header again to sort the list in reverse alphabetical order.

• SAVE F3—saves the current part program to a hard drive, network drive,
floppy disk, or USB memory device. If the program has a path indicated in
Program Manager, it will be saved to the same location.

Hurco recommends the following storage areas in My Computer:

• 3½ Floppy (A:)
• PART_PROGS (D:)
• USB Device (E:)
• My Network Places (if the UltiNet option is installed)
Programs cannot be saved to the root level of the My Computer or
My Documents directories. You must open these to see the directory
listing before you can save to these areas.

• SAVE AS F4—allows the current part program to be saved with a different

name, as a different file type, or in a different location. Also used to save files
with the default NONAME program name. Type the program name in the File
Name box and select the file type, as in the following example:

To rename a program, highlight the entire name in the FILE NAME field and
type or use alpha/numeric console keys to replace the name. To modify
character(s) in the name, highlight the name, select again in the field, and
use the cursor keys, delete, and the alpha/numeric keys to change the name.
When the filename is completely highlighted, the filename extension does not
have to be re-entered; the extension selected in the SAVE AS TYPE field will
be added to the name entered in the FILE NAME field.

For Conversational programs, the following file types are available from the
Save As Type drop-down list:

• .HWM—WinMax Mill conversational format

• .HD5—WinMax Desktop conversational format (desktop only)
• .HD3—Ultimax conversational format

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Program Manager 2-3

 To save as an HWM file, select the SAVE F1 softkey.

To save as an HD3 (or HD5) file, select the EXPORT F2 softkey.

For NC programs, SAVE AS will default extensions to the selected NC dialect,

either FNC or HNC. If another extension is desired, include the extension with
the filename in the FILE NAME field. For example, SAMPLE. NC.

• CLOSE F5—opens a menu to close selected program or all programs.

• Program Properties F6—stores properties for the selected part program.
• Disk Operations F7—opens the Disk Operations screen to browse available
folders and files, and cut, copy, paste, rename, and delete files.
• FTP Manager F8—displays external network connections (with the Ultinet
option).

Program Properties
Program properties stores and manages properties for the selected part program.

Fields are:

• DISPLAY UNITS—the unit of measurement (inches or millimeters) used

throughout part programming (this field does not apply to NC programs).
These units will be used when the part program is loaded into memory but
the display value can be changed using the unit (IN or MM) icon in the status
bar.
• NAME—the file name of the part program. This field appears as read-only.
• PATH—the media and directory path to the saved program. This field
appears as read-only.
• MATERIAL—the material to be used, if specified (optional). This field
appears as read-only; however, the material can be changed with the
CHANGE MATERIAL F3 softkey. See Tool and Material Database, on page 4 -
41 for more information.
• DESCRIPTION—a short text description of the part program.
• PROGRAM TYPE—specifies the type of program. Use the drop-down list to
change the program type in this field. Program type may be changed for an
exisiting program, and any incompatible data blocks or part setup data is
removed from the program.

The default Conversational Program Type can be set in Coversational

Settings, see Conversational Settings, on page 3 - 6 for more information.

• WRITE PROTECTION—prevents changes to the program from being saved

when set to ON. Changes can be made if set to OFF.

A write-protected program can be saved with a different program

name. The user will be prompted to do this when attempting to save.

2 - 4 Program Manager 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Disk Operations
Disk Operations displays available directories and files. Cut, copy, paste, rename, and
delete program files from Disk Operations.

See also:

Managing Program Files, on page 2 - 1

Import / Export Functions, on page 4 - 53

NC States, on page 4 - 53

Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 3 - 41

Directory Window Files Window

Figure 2–3. Disk Operations

When a directory is highlighted in the Directory window, the softkeys are:

• CUT DIRECTORY F1—deletes the directory from one location to be pasted

into another location
• COPY DIRECTORY F2—makes a copy of the directory (but does not delete)
to be pasted into another location
• PASTE INTO DIRECTORY F3—pastes the directory or file that has been cut
or copied. For example, to copy a directory and paste it into a new location:
1. Highlight the directory you wish to copy.
2. Select the COPY DIRECTORY F2 softkey.
3. Highlight the folder in which you wish to place the copied directory.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Program Manager 2-5

 4. Select the PASTE INTO DIRECTORY F3 softkey.
• CREATE DIRECTORY F4—creates a new directory
• RENAME DIRECTORY F5—renames a directory
• DELETE DIRECTORY F6—removes the directory
• FTP MANAGER F7—displays the external network connections (with Ultinet
option)

When a file is highlighted in the Files Window, the softkeys are:

• CUT F1—deletes the file from one location to be pasted into another location
• COPY F2—makes a copy of the file (but does not delete) to be pasted into
another location
• PASTE F3—pastes the file that has been cut or copied. For example, to copy
a file and paste it into a new location:
1. Highlight the file you wish to copy.
2. Select the COPY F2 softkey.
3. Highlight the folder in which you wish to place the copied file.
4. Select the PASTE F3 softkey.
• RENAME F4—renames the file
• DELETE F5—removes the file
• LOAD F6—loads the file into the Program Manager
• FTP MANAGER F7—displays the external network connections (with Ultinet
option)

FTP Manager
FTP Manager allows you to transfer programs from a remote location (host), such as a PC
or machine, to a local PC or another machine, using the UltiNet option. See WinMax Mill
Options for more information.

2 - 6 Program Manager 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

UTILITIES
Utilities are accessed with the Auxiliary console key. Select the Auxiliary console key and
this window with softkey selections appears on the screen:

Figure 3–1. Auxiliary Screen

Use the softkeys on the Auxiliary screen to navigate to other parts of WinMax Mill. Also
toggle the Edit Lockout feature on and off with the Toggle Edit Lockout State softkey.
See Edit Lockout, on page 3 - 4 for more information.

Select the Utility Screen softkey to access the Utility screen. These functions are
available and are described in this section:

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
Machine Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Additional Utilities Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
Printing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
Integrator Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 38
Serial I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 39
Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 39

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-1

System Configuration
The SYSTEM CONFIGURATION softkey on the Utilities screen displays machine, control,
and software information. Softkeys on the System Configuration submenu are:

• WinMax Configuration—changes WinMax configuration settings.

• Machine Specifications—changes machine specifications.
• Backup Config & Machine Files—copy Configuration and Machine files to a
directory or to a USB memory device or floppy disk.
• Restore Config & Machine Files—use saved files to overwrite existing
Configuration and Machine files.

WinMax Configuration
The WinMax Configuration softkeys are:

• Software Version—displays the current version of WinMax Mill.

• Software Options—displays the current software options available for the
machining center.
• Motion Configuration—displays the current motion system. Motion system
can be changed in this screen if the Ultinet Option is enabled; select Standard
or UltiMotion in the Motion System field.
• Ladder File Configuration—Ladder files bridge communication between the
machine and the software. The current version of the Ladder files on the
machining center, the total number of Ladder files, and any mismatched
Ladder files that may cause a software conflict are displayed.
• Language File Configuration—displays the language files.
• WinMax IP Address—displays the current IP address of the CNC.

Machine Specifications
Displays specific information about the machining center that was entered during
software/machine installation.

• Machine Class—The physical orientation of the spindle, relative to the table

surface. The possible machine classes are vertical, horizontal, and universal.
• Vertical/Horizontal—The current orientation of the machine. This field will
be vertical for vertical machines and horizontal for horizontal machines. For
universal machines, this field can be either vertical or horizontal.
• Number of Axes Present—The number of axes present on the machining
center.
• Machine Hour Meter—Total number of machine hours expended to date.
• Maximum Spindle Motor Speed—The maximum acceptable speed for the
spindle.
• Maximum Spindle Tool Speed—The maximum acceptable speed for a tool
in the spindle.

3 - 2 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 • Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate—The maximum rapid traverse rate.
• Maximum Contouring Rate—The maximum feedrate for contouring.
• Minus/Plus X/Y/Z Direction Travel Limit—The maximum and minimum
travel limits for the X, Y and Z axes.
• Minus/Plus A/B/C Direction Travel Limit—The maximum and minimum
travel limits for the A, B, and c axes.

Backup Config & Machine Files

Backup files can be used to restore corrupted Configuration and Machine files on the hard
drive. Select this softkey and choose the location to copy the files. Backup files can be
copied to any directory on the hard drive or to a USB memory device or floppy diskette.

Restore Config & Machine Files

Select this softkey to use saved Configuration and Machine files to overwrite existing files
stored on the hard drive.

User Preferences
The USER PREFERENCES softkey on the Utilities screen provides access to the following:

• User Interface Settings, on page 3 - 3

• Conversational Settings, on page 3 - 6
• NC Settings, on page 3 - 7
• Autosave Settings, on page 3 - 8
• Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3 - 8
• Machine Parameters, on page 3 - 11
• Serial Port Settings, on page 3 - 32
• FTP Server Settings, on page 3 - 33
• Rotary Axes Parameters, on page 3 - 33
• WinMax Uptime, on page 3 - 33
• Select Language, on page 3 - 34
• Data Logging Filters, on page 3 - 34

User Interface Settings

User Interface Settings change the screen display. Fields are:

• Screen Configuration (desktop only)—select Dual Screen or Single Screen

display. Default is Single.
• Application Font Size—size of text displayed by the application in lists (for

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-3

 example, in Program Manager); default is Large. This field is inactive in
WinMax Mill (active in WinMax desktop).
• Softkey Menu Position—positions the softkey menu to the right or left of
the screen; default is Right.
• Edit Mode—select either Ultimax Classic (default) or Windows Dialog. For
example, Ultimax Classic requires the Enter key to change the value of a data
field, while Windows Dialog will accept a number by pressing the Down
arrow.
• Enable Program Restore—resets previously loaded programs when the
application is started after a shutdown; default is No.
• Show All File Types—view all file extensions when opening files; default is
No (only displays HWM, HD3, HD5, FNC, HNC, and NC file types).
• Screensaver Timeout—set screensaver timeout in minutes (range is 1-30
minutes); default is 10.
• List Control Rows—select the appearance of list controls; default is Lines.
• List Icon Size—specify Small or Large for the size of icons in lists.
• Warn Before Saving In Old Format—specify if WinMax should warn that
information may be lost when saving a program as HD3.
• Max Memory Load—controls the amount of system memory that graphics
generation uses. The range is 50% to 100%; default is 85%. Graphics
generation that uses more than the specified memory will be aborted by the
system and an error message will be displayed. Raising the maximum
memory load allows large programs to be drawn.
If Max Memory Load is set to 100%, graphics generation will not
abort even if all system memory is being used to draw a graphic.

• Edit Lockout Level—sets the level of protection, Partial or Full, to limit

access to part programming softkeys and other functions when Edit Lockout
feature is enabled.

Edit Lockout

The Edit Lockout feature limits access to certain program functions and screens. Partial
and Full lockout levels are available. Partial lockout prevents changes to the part
program, while Full lockout prevents changes to the program as well as to setup
information. Refer to the table below for a complete listing of features that are affected
by partial and full lockout.

Edit Lockout is enabled or disabled with the Toggle Edit Lockout State softkey located
on the Auxiliary screen. When the softkey is selected, a pop-up box appears prompting
for the password. Enter the password and select OK. The Edit Lockout feature is enabled
(or disabled if it was previously enabled), and a confirmation message appears.

Set Edit Lockout Level to Partial or Full on the User Interface Settings screen:

1. Select the Auxiliary console key. The Auxiliary screen opens.

2. Select the Utility Screen softkey.
3. Select the User Preferences softkey.
4. Select the User Interface Settings softkey. Select Partial or Full in the

3 - 4 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 Edit Lockout Level field. When Partial is selected, you can also lock out Part
Setup and/or Tool Setup.

When the cursor is in the Edit Lockout Level field, the Change Lockout
Password softkey is available. The first time the feature is used, the
password should be reset from the factory default. This password is
required to enable and disable Edit Lockout.

You will be redirected to the Input screen if you are on a screen that
becomes locked out when you enter the password.

Here are the features locked with Edit Lockout:

Feature Partial Full

Part Programming Locked Locked

Program Parameters Locked Locked

Program Review: Multiple Block Locked Locked

Functions (Copy, Paste, Insert, Delete)

Copy/Change Blocks Locked Locked

Erase Functions Erase Part Program and Parameters Locked

locked

Capture Feeds and Speeds (Auto) Locked Locked

DXF Locked Locked

DB Search / Block Jump Locked Locked

Jump to Block (from Error Message) Locked Locked

Import Functions Import Part Program and Locked

Parameters locked

Part Setup Depends on setting Locked

Work Offsets Accessible with Part Setup access Locked

Tool Setup Depends on setting Locked

Tool Setup: Feeds and Speeds When Tool Setup is accessible, feeds Locked
and speeds are updated, but data
blocks that use the tools are not.

Tool Offsets Accessible with Tool Setup access Locked

Part Program Tool Review: Match Accessible with Tool Setup access Locked
Tools, Add Unmatched Tool

User Preferences Accessible Locked

Probing Cycles Accessible Locked

Part Counter Accessible Locked

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-5

 Fields or softkeys appear grayed out and are not accessible when
lockout mode is enabled. In cases where an entire screen is locked
out, you will be redirected to the Input screen.

Additional Edit Lockout considerations:

• Runtime modifications—Edit Lockout does not prevent a running program

from modifying setup or itself. For instance, if the program uses part or tool
probing blocks or macros that manipulate program variables or part or tool
setup directly, this is allowed.
• Recovery Restart—Recovery Restart is enabled in both conversational and NC
modes when Edit Lockout is enabled. Access to the NC Editor is allowed in
this case in order to set the restart marker, but text entry and all softkeys
that allow modification of the program (for example, Cut and Paste) are
disabled.
• Overrides—Speed/Feed overrides are controlled by the Override Lockout
parameter in Program Parameters General 1 tab. Since Program Parameters
are not accessible in Partial or Full lockout mode, Override Lockout should be
set to ON so overrides cannot be adjusted while running the program.

Conversational Settings
Conversational Settings fields are:

• Math Assist Style—select either Ultimax Classic or Standard Calculator

interface to be used when editing data fields.

Ultimax Classic—select operation (=,-,*,/), then number, and then

Enter. For example, if the number 5 is displayed as a value, pressing “+”
and the number 3 will change the value to 8.

Standard Calculator—select number, then operation (=,-,*,/), then

Enter. For example, if the number 5 is displayed as a value, pressing 3
and “+” will change the value to 8.

• Check Calc Assist Inconsistencies—this setting is useful when there are

slight discrepancies or conflicts in contour data; for example, as happens
occasionally with contours imported using DXF, due to bad segment
connections in the DXF file. When set to Yes, an error message is generated
when these inconsistencies are present in a contour segment. When set to
No, the contour is allowed to draw and run, as long as there is enough
relevant data to generate valid geometry.
• Default Conversational Program Type—select the default program type
when creating new Conversational programs.
• Display Machine Axes For Universal Type—select Yes to display, in Part
Setup, only the rotary axes that are available on the machine.
• HD3 Save Program Type—select the program type used when exporting

3 - 6 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 conversational programs to the HD3 file format.
Choices for HWM and HD3 Program Types are:

Standard = 3-axis

Rotary A or Rotary B = 4-axis

Rotary A, Tilt B, or Tilt A, Rotary C = 5-axis

• Warn Before Saving in Old Format—select Yes to display a warning

message when a program is about to be saved in the HD3 file format, which
may not support some conversational features.
• Data Block Tool Entry Feed and Speed Update—specify how tool feeds
and speeds should be updated when a tool is changed in a data block.

NC Settings
NC Settings fields are:

• NC Dialect—select Basic or Industry Standard NC.

• NC Display Type—select axes data:

Standard = 3-axis

Rotary A or Rotary B = 4-axis

Rotary A, Tilt B or Tilt A, Rotary C = 5-axis

Universal Rotary = all types

• Exported NC Decimal Places—indicate the number of decimal places

expressed when exporting a conversational program as NC (range is 1-8);
desktop version only
• BPRNT/DPRNT Output Device—select where to output BPRINT and
DPRINT formatted data; desktop version only.
• BPRNT/DPRNT Output File—specify the file path if BPRINT and DPRINT
data will be output to a file; desktop version only.
• Custom NC File Extension—provide a custom filename extension to enable
loading of NC files that use the extension.
• Disable Tool Length Offset Table—select Yes to disable access to the Tool
Length Offsets table in Tool Setup. Default is No. When Yes, Tool Length
Offsets are cleared and only the Radius Offsets table can be accessed in Tool
Setup.
• Save NC State with Program—when set to Yes, an NC State file is saved
with the NC program, in the same directory and with the same name. Default
is No.

NC Variable Monitoring settings:

• Enable Variable Monitoring—select Yes to enable monitoring of an NC

variable during the program run. Default is No.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-7

 • Monitored Variable Number—specify the variable number to be
monitored.
• Enable Reset at Program Start—select Yes to enable variable reset at the
start of program run.
• Variable Reset Value—enter the variable reset value.

Autosave Settings
Autosave Settings fields are:

• ENABLE AUTOMATIC SAVE—turn Autosave on or off; if Yes, programs are

saved to memory at the time interval specified—it will not save to the source
location of the program.
• SAVE FREQUENCY—specify number of minutes between each autosave;
range is 1-255.
• SAVE ACTIVE PROGRAM ONLY—specify Yes to save only the current
program; specify No to save all loaded programs; default is No.

Tool Utilities and Settings

General tab
The Tool Utilities and Settings screen is accessed from Utilities/User Preferences. Fields
vary dependent on whether the Tool and Material Library option is loaded.

With the Tool & Material Library option, fields are:

• Tool Calibration Mode—sets the method used to calibrate tools.

• Zero Calibration—stores the tip of tool dimension relative to home
position (machine zero in z axis). See Zero Calibration Mode, on page 4 -
20 for more information.
• Absolute Tool Length—stores the actual length of the tool from spindle
nose to the tip of tool. See Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 4 - 17 for
more information. This is the default setting.
• Use Tool Type Checking—only allow the selection of tool types that are
valid for the operation in conversational mode:
• YES—only the tools that are valid for the data block can be selected (i.e.,
drills and taps displayed for hole operations)
• NO—allows any tool to be selected for any data block
• Update Data Blocks With Tool Changes—Update feeds and speeds in
conversational data blocks when tool feeds and speeds are changed. Specify
if update this should occur automatically, prompt first, or should not update.
• Replace In Files—specify if new tool feeds and speeds should be updated in
current editing file only or in all open files.

Matching tab
• Automatically Load Unmatched Tools As Manual—automatically loads

3 - 8 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 unmatched tools from newly-loaded conversational part programs:
• YES—new tools from the newly loaded program (that are not in the Tool &
Material Library) are automatically added to Manual.
• NO—requires new tools to be matched (see “Part Program Tool Review”
section for more information about matching tools.)
• Overwrite Existing Zero Calibration (Zero Calibration mode)—when
matching tools during a program load, the zero calibration from the program
replaces the calibration for the tool on the machine. Default is YES.
The OVERWRITE EXISTING ZERO CALIBRATION setting applies both
to tools that are automatically matched (during a program load), as
well as tools that are manually matched.

• Maximum Diameter Difference—the maximum diameter difference for a

tool to be considered a match.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-9

Life Monitoring tab
• Enable Tool Life Monitoring—select Yes to enable tool wear monitoring.
When enabled, the current cutting time is compared to the maximum cutting
time set for the tool in Tool Setup Cutting Time field.
• Display Warning Message—specify if you want a warning message to post
when a tool’s maximum cutting time is exceeded.
• Mark Tool Defective—when set to Yes, the program run will abort when
attempting to change to a tool that has exceeded its maximum cutting time.
The Life Monitoring tab is not displayed if the Tool & Material Library
option is not installed.

3 - 10 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine Parameters
The Machine Parameters screens list various parameters, the range of values that can be
set for each parameter, and the current set or default value. The values of the Machine
Parameters may be changed by the operator.

The machine, part, and/or tool may be damaged if parameters are

changed without understanding the machine operation that may be
affected by the change.

The fields that will be displayed on the Machine Parameters screens are dependent upon
machine type. The values shown on the following screen figures are the default factory
settings for HMX and VTX series machines.

Follow these steps to access the Machine Parameters screens:

1. Select the AUXILARY console key.

2. Select the Utility Screen icon.
3. Select the USER PREFERENCES F2 softkey.
4. Select the MACHINE PARAMETERS F6 softkey.

Figure 3–2. Machine Parameters, Page 1

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-11

Machine Parameters - Page 1
Parameter Description Range Default

Coolant Delay Time Sets the time the program pauses 0-60 seconds 0
when the coolant is enabled.

Pulsating or Delay Sets the Washdown Coolant pump run 0 (continuous) 0 or 1

Washdown Enable cycle; used in conjunction with other 1 (pulsating) (depends on
washdown coolant parameters. machine)
2 (delay)

Alt Washdown Dwell Controls washdown coolant flow on the 0-32767 500 or 1000
right side of the machine enclosure on (.01 sec) (depends on
certain machines. Used in conjunction machine)
with other washdown coolant
parameters.

Alt Dwell Lt Side Controls washdown coolant flow on the 0-32767 (.01 200
left side of the machine enclosure on sec)
certain machines. Used in conjunction
with other washdown coolant
parameters.

Alt Washdown Off Sets the time the washdown coolant 0-32767 (.01 0 or 200
Time flow cycle is paused, on certain sec) (depends on
machines. machine)

Washdown On Delay Defines the time the washdown coolant 0-9999 0

Timer pump is on; used with Washdown Off seconds
Delay Timer.

Washdown Off Defines the time the washdown coolant 0-9999 0

Delay Timer pump is off; used with Washdown On seconds
Delay Timer.

Control Power Off Turns the control off after the specified 0-255 120
Time period of inactivity. minutes

Disable Tool Picker Turns off the Tool Picker option. 0 (enable) 0
Option 1 (disable)

Enable Dual Zones Sets a dual-zone capable machine as 0 (1 zone - 1

either a single long bed machine, or as long bed)
a dual-zone machine. 1 (dual zones)

3 - 12 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Coolant Parameters
The coolant parameters are used to control coolant flow to the spindle (known as flood
coolant), coolant flow in the machine enclosure (known as washdown coolant), or to turn
the washdown coolant pump on or off. The Washdown Coolant Pump must be On for Right
and Left side operation. Some coolant parameters may not be functional on your
machine. For examples of how to use washdown coolant parameters on your Hurco
machine, see Table 3–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 3 - 19.

Washdown coolant flow for VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, and VMX60 machines is
continuos to both sides of the enclosure. The amount of washdown coolant used during
machining operations is controlled by cycling the washdown coolant pump.

VMX64 and VMX84 machines are equipped with a butterfly solenoid that alternates
washdown coolant flow between the right and left sides of the machine enclosure.

This is the washdown coolant flow cycle for VMX64 and VMX84 machines:

1. Coolant flows on right side of machine enclosure (defined in Alt Washdown

Dwell).
2. Pause time of no coolant flow (defined in Alt Washdown Off Time).
3. Coolant flows on left side of machine enclosure (defined in Alt Dwell Lt Side).
4. Pause time of no coolant flow (defined in Alt Washdown Off Time).

The amount of washdown coolant used during machining operations for VMX64 and
VMX84 machines is controlled by the time washdown coolant flows/pauses to each side of
the machine enclosure, and/or by cycling the washdown coolant pump.

VMX64 and VMX84 machines are equipped with a separate Factory-configured timer to
control the Y-axis rear way cover washdown on and off cycles.

These coolant parameters are found on Page 1 of Machine Parameters:

• Coolant Delay Time

• Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable
• Alt Washdown Dwell
• Alt Dwell Lt Side
• Alt Washdown Off Time
• Washdown On Delay Timer
• Washdown Off Delay Timer

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-13

Coolant Delay Time
The Coolant Delay Time parameter pauses the running part program for the indicated
time whenever the program enables the primary or secondary flood coolant. Set the
Coolant Delay Time parameter to pause the program long enough to allow flood coolant
to pump from the coolant tank to the head-mounted nozzles around the spindle before
the tool enters the workpiece.

The default setting for Coolant Delay Time is 0 seconds.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable

This parameter is used with other washdown coolant features to regulate washdown
coolant flow for continuous clearing of chips from the machine enclosure.

Parameter operation is determined by machine type.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60—use this parameter to manage

washdown coolant flow:
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 0, washdown coolant will
continuously flow on the right and left sides of the machine enclosure.
Values in the Alt Washdown Dwell, Alt Dwell Lt Side, or Alt Washdown Off
Time will have no effect on washdown coolant operation.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, do not use this setting
for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, or VMX60 machine. If unexpected
performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the
Maintenance and Safety Manual.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 2, the washdown coolant
pump will cycle for the times defined in Washdown Delay On Timer and
Washdown Delay Off Timer.
• The default setting for Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is 0.

• VMX64, VMX84—use this parameter to alternate washdown coolant flow on

the machine enclosure:
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 0, do not use this setting
for a VMX64 or VMX84 machine. If unexpected performance occurs, refer
to the Machine Maintenance section of the Maintenance and Safety
Manual.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, washdown coolant flow
will cycle for the times defined in Alt Washdown Dwell, Alt Dwell Lt Side
and Alt Washdown Off Time.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable parameter = 2, the washdown
coolant pump will cycle for the times defined in Washdown On Delay
Timer and Washdown Off Delay Timer, whether or not washdown coolant
flow is alternating in the machine enclosure.
• The default setting for Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is 1.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.

3 - 14 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Alt Washdown Dwell
This parameter controls the time washdown coolant flows on the right side of the machine
enclosure. Alt Washdown Dwell is used with Alt Washdown Off Time to define the
washdown coolant flow cycle on the right side of the machine enclosure. The value for Alt
Washdown Dwell in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500 equates to 5 sec.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Washdown Dwell.
Parameter operation is determined by machine type.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60

• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, do not use this setting for
a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine. If unexpected
performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the
Maintenance and Safety Manual.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 2, Alt Washdown Dwell is
not functional; entering a value in Alt Washdown Dwell will have no effect
on washdown coolant flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60
machine.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 500 (5 seconds), but set
this parameter to 0 to avoid unexpected performance. If unexpected
performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the
Maintenance and Safety Manual.
• VMX64—When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1 or 2, define the
time for washdown coolant to flow on the right side of the machine enclosure.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 500 (5 seconds).

• VMX84—When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1 or 2, define the

time for washdown coolant to flow on the right side of the machine enclosure.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 1000 (10 seconds).

Alternating Washdown Dwell is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-15

Alt Dwell Lt Side
On VMX60, VMX64, and VMX84 machines, this parameter controls the time washdown
coolant flows on the left side of the machine enclosure. Alt Dwell Lt Side is used with Alt
Washdown Off Time to cycle washdown coolant flow on the left side of the machine
enclosure. The value for Alt Dwell Lt Side is in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500
equates to 5 sec.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Dwell Lt Side.
Parameter operation is determined by machine type.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60—Alt Dwell Lt Side is not

functional; entering a value in Alt Dwell Lt Side will not affect washdown
coolant flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine.

• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 200 (2 seconds), but you
should set this parameter to 0 to avoid unexpected performance. If
unexpected performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance
section of the Maintenance and Safety Manual.
• VMX64, VMX84—define the time for washdown coolant to flow on the left
side of the machine enclosure.
• Alt Dwell Lt Side will only function if the Alt Washdown Dwell is greater
than 0. If the value of Alt Washdown Dwell is 0, the machine will ignore
Alt Dwell Lt Side and washdown coolant will not flow on either side of the
machine enclosure.
• If Alt Dwell Lt Side = 0 and Alt Washdown Dwell is greater than 0,
washdown coolant will flow to the left side of the enclosure for the time
defined in Alt Washdown Dwell.
• The default setting for Alt Dwell Lt Side is 200 (2 seconds).

Alternating Dwell Left Side is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.

3 - 16 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Alt Washdown Off Time
On VMX64 and VMX84 machines, this parameter defines the pause time in the washdown
coolant flow cycle. The value is in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500 equates to 5
sec.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Washdown Off Time.
Parameter operation is determined by machine type.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60 - Alt Washdown Off Time is not
functional; entering a value in Alt Washdown Off Time will not affect
washdown coolant flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60
machine.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Off Time is 0; this parameter is not
functional for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, or VMX60 machine.
• VMX64, VMX84—When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1 or 2,
washdown coolant flow will pause for the time indicated in the Alt Washdown
Off Time after coolant flow on each side of the enclosure.
• If Alt Washdown Off Time is set to 0, the washdown off-time is 0.7 sec.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Off Time is 200 (2 seconds).

Alternating Washdown Off Time is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.

Washdown On Delay Timer

This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is On, and is
used with the Washdown Off Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. The default setting
for Washdown On Delay Timer is 0 seconds.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 2 to use Washdown On Delay Timer.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60—washdown coolant flow will be

continuous to both sides of the machine enclosure during the time the
washdown coolant pump is On.
• VMX64, VMX84—the washdown coolant pump is On for the time defined,
whether or not washdown coolant flow is alternating in the machine
enclosure. Table 3–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 3 - 19
shows an example where the washdown coolant pump cycles on and off while
washdown coolant flow is alternating on the machine enclosure.
It is recommended that you follow this formula:

Washdown On Delay Timer = Alt Washdown Dwell + Washdown Off

Delay Timer + ALT Dwell Left Side + Washdown Off Delay Timer

See Table 3–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 3 -

19.

• The default setting for Washdown On Delay Timer is 0 seconds.

This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is On, and is
used with the Washdown Off Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. Washdown On Delay
Timer is not functional for VM machines.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-17

Washdown Off Delay Timer
This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is Off, and is
used with the Washdown On Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. The functionality of
this feature is dependent upon machine type. Washdown Off Delay Timer is not functional
for VM machines.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 2 to use this parameter.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60—defines the time the washdown

coolant pump is Off.
• VMX64, VMX84—defines the time the washdown coolant pump is Off,
whether or not coolant flow is alternating in the machine enclosure.
It is recommended that you follow this formula:

Washdown Off Delay Timer = Alt Washdown Dwell + Washdown On

Delay Timer + Alt Dwell Left Side + Washdown On Delay Timer

See Table 3–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 3 -

19.

Washdown Off Delay Timer should be calculated using even multiples

of its value, increasing it by that value.

For example, if the calculated value is 30, then you can increase it to
60, 90, etc.

• The default setting for Washdown Off Delay Timer is 0 seconds.

3 - 18 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Examples for Coolant Parameters Use
VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, and VMX60
N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Parameters)
247 228 248 249 297 298 Result
0 0 0 0 0 0 Continuous washdown coolant flow.
1. Washdown coolant pump on for 20 sec.
2 0 0 0 20 45 2. Pump off for 45 sec.
3. Cycle repeats.

VMX64, VMX84
N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Parameters)
2471 228 248 249 297 298 Result
1. Right side washdown coolant for 8 sec.
2. No coolant for 0.7 sec.
1 800 600 0 0 0 3. Left side washdown coolant for 6 sec.
4. No coolant for 0.7 sec.
5. Cycle repeats.
1. Right side washdown coolant for 8 sec.
2. No coolant for 2.5 sec.
1 800 600 250 0 0 3. Left side washdown coolant for 6 sec.
4. No coolant for 2.5 sec.
5. Cycle repeats.
1. Right side washdown coolant for 10 sec.
2. No coolant for 5 sec.
3. Left side washdown coolant for 10 sec.
4. No coolant for 5 sec.
2 1000 1000 500 30 60
5. Washdown coolant pump on for 30 sec during
right & left cycles.
6. Pump off for 60 sec.
7. Cycle repeats.
1. A value of 3 programmed for N95:247 enables control of the Y-Axis Washdown.

Key to N95 Code Column Headings for Tables Above

Integrator Configuration Definition
Parameter
N95:247 Pulsating or Delay WD Enable
N95:228 Alt WD Dwell
N95:248 Alt Dwell Lt Side
N95:249 Alt WD Off Time
N95:297 WD On Delay Timer
N95:298 WD Off Delay Timer

Table 3–1. Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-19

Control Power Off Time

Turns the control off after the specified period of activity.

The default setting for Control Power Off Time is 120 minutes.

Disable Tool Picker Option

Turns off the Tool Fixture (TPS) option, if it is present on your VM, VMX, or VTXU
machine. Refer to the Tool Fixture (TPS) chapter in the Options manual.

The default setting for Disable Tool Picker Option is 0.

The Disable Tool Picker Option parameter is not functional on HMX machines.

Enable Dual Zones

This parameter enables zones on a dual-zone machine. 0 sets both zones as a single long
bed machine, and 1 sets the zones as separate zones. The default is 1.

Select the Page 2 F2 softkey to access Machine Parameters Page 2:

Figure 3–3. Machine Parameters, HMX (left) and VTXU (right), Page 2

3 - 20 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine Parameters - Page 2
Parameter Description Range Default

CAL to LS Velocity Sets the feedrate for the X, Y, or Z axis as 100-2540 1270
X, Y, Z it moves toward the calibration limit MMPM
switch during a machine calibration cycle.
See Cal to LS Velocity Parameters.

CAL to LS Velocity Sets the feedrate for the A, B, or C axis as 100-2540 0

A, B, C it moves toward the calibration limit DPM
switch during a machine calibration cycle.
See Cal to LS Velocity Parameters.

Auto Balance Enable Adjusts the balance between the motion 0 (disable) 1
card and the servo drives at the start of 1 (enable)
calibration and run program.

ATC Disable Disables all automatic tool changer 0 (enable) 0

functions. 1 (disable)

Rapid Override Enables or disables the Rapid Override 0 (enable) 0

Disable potentiometer on the console. 1 (disable)

Tilt Axis Safety Sets the position for the tilt axis during an 0-360 0
Position automatic tool change when the Table degrees
Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an
Automatic Tool Change.

X-Axis Safety Position Sets the absolute X axis machine location Travel Limits 0
to which the table will move when the (mm)
Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes
for an Automatic Tool Change. See X-Axis
and Y-Axis Safety Position.

Y-Axis Safety Position Sets the absolute Y axis machine location Travel Limits 0
to which the table will move when the (mm)
Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes
for an Automatic Tool Change. See X-Axis
and Y-Axis Safety Position.

ATC Z-Axis Move to On HMX only, moves the Z-axis to zero 0 (disable) 0
Zero Position position at the end of a tool change. 1 (enable)

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-21

Cal to LS Velocity Parameters
The Cal to LS Velocity parameters set the feed rate for each axis as it is moving towards
the calibration limit switch during a machine calibration cycle. Only the axes that are
present on the machine need to be set. The units are indicated in parentheses and can be
MMPM (millimeters per minute), IPM (inches per minute), or DPM (degrees per minute).

• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1270 MMPM (50
IPM) for the X, Y, and Z axes. The range for Cal to LS Velocity values for the
X, Y, and Z axes is 100 MMPM to 2540 MMPM.
• The default setting for Calibrate to LS Velocity is 0 DPM for the A, B, and C
axes. The range for Cal to LS Velocity values for the A, B, and C axes is 100
DPM to 2540 DPM.
• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1270 mmpm (50
IPM) for X, Y, and Z axes.
• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1000 mmpm
(39.37 IPM) for A axis on a VTXU machine.
• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 2000 (78.74 IPM)
mmpm for B axis on an HMX machine.
• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1000 mmpm (50
IPM) for C axis on a VTXU machine.

Auto Balance Enable

Auto Balance Enable set to 1 will have the logic controller send an auto balance request
to adjust the balance between the motion card and the servo drives at the start of
calibration and run program. No auto balance request will be sent if the parameter is 0.

The default setting for Auto Balance Enable is 1.

ATC and Rapid Override Disable Parameters

ATC Disable
The ATC Disable parameter allows the user to completely disable all automatic tool
change functions. Setting the ATC Disable parameter to 1 disables the Auto Tool Change
button (for performing tool changes in Manual mode or Tool Setup) and the Auto Tool
Change in Auto mode button (for running programs). With ATC Disable set to 1, all tools
will have to be inserted and removed manually using the Spindle Clamp/Unclamp button
mounted on the head.

When ATC is disabled, the Control assumes that the ATC is in a safe
position to allow normal X, Y, and Z axis movement. Input status for
the ATC at home position will not be checked. Failure to ensure that
the ATC is in a safe position may result in machine damage.

The default setting for ATC Disable is 0.

Rapid Override Disable

3 - 22 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

The Rapid Override Disable parameter allows the user to enable or disable the Rapid
Override potentiometer on the console. Rapid Override Disable set to 1 disables the Rapid
Override potentiometer so that all rapid movements in an automatic operation will be at
the programmed setting. Rapid Override Disable set to 0 enables the Rapid Override so
that rapid movements in an automatic operation may be adjusted slower than the
programmed setting.

The default setting for Rapid Override Disable parameter is 0.

Axis Safety Position Parameters

Tilt Axis Safety Position
The Tilt Axis Safety Position parameter sets the position for the tilt axis on the VTXU
machine during an ATC if either one of the following conditions occurs:

• the Move to Safe Pos During TC parameter is set to Yes (for Auto Run mode).
• the Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC parameter (for Manual or Input
modes) is set to 1.

After the Z retracts before the ATC, the tilt axis moves to the position indicated in
degrees. After the automatic tool change completes, the tilt axis returns to the original
position.

The default setting for Tilt Axis Safety Position is 0.

The Tilt Axis Safety Position parameter is not functional for HMX machines, VM machines,
or VMX machines.

X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position

The X-Axis Safety Position and Y-Axis Safety Position parameters determine the absolute
X-axis and Y-axis machine locations, in millimeters, to which the table will move when the
Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See Program
Parameters for more information.During an automatic tool change with the Table Safety
Move set to Yes:

1. The Z-axis will retract to maximum position.

2. The X-axis and Y-axis will move at rapid feedrate to the X-Axis Safety Position
and the Y-Axis Safety Position, respectively.
3. The automatic tool change will complete.
4. The X-axis and Y-axis will move at rapid feedrate to the previous X-axis and Y-
axis positions before the move to the X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Positions.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-23

The X-Axis Safety Position value must not exceed the minimum or maximum travel limits
for the X-axis. The Y-Axis Safety Position value must not exceed the minimum or
maximum travel limits for the Y-axis. If the Table Safety Move parameter is set to No,
these parameters are not used, and steps 1, 2, and 4 above are not executed for an
automatic tool change.

The default setting for X-Axis Safety Position is 0.000 mm. The default setting for Y-Axis
Safety Position is 0.000 mm.

The X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position parameters are not functional for HMX machines.

ATC Z-Axis Parameter

ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position
This parameter is functional only on an HMX machine. The ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero
Position parameter moves the Z-axis to the zero (0) position at the end of either an Auto
or Manual tool change.

ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position set to 0 disables the parameter. ATC Z-Axis Move to
Zero Position set to 1 enables the parameter.

The default setting for ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position is 0.

ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position parameter is not functional for VTXU, VM, or VMX
machines.

Select the Page 3 F3 softkey to access Machine Parameters Page 3:

Figure 3–4. Machine Parameters, Page 3

3 - 24 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine Parameter - Page 3
Parameter Description Range Default

Aux Output 1, 2, 3, 4 Enables a confirmation signal for 0 (disable 0

Confirmation Enable completion of each Auxiliary M-code 1 (enable)
Output.

Disable Aux Out 1, 2, Disables the specified Auxiliary M-code 0 (enable) 0

3, 4 During Interrupt Output when an Interrupt cycle is selected 1 (disable)
during Auto Run mode.

Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC operations are 0 (disable) 0

Manual Mode ATC performed at Safety Position when 1 (enable)
enabled.

Chip Conveyor On/Off Enables the Chip Conveyor Delay. 0 (disable) 0

Delay Enable 1 (enable)

Chip Conveyor On Sets the time the Chip Conveyor cycles on, 0-9999 0
Delay Time when Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay is seconds
enabled.

Chip Conveyor Off Sets the time the Chip Conveyor cycles off, 0-9999 0
Delay Time when Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay is seconds
enabled.

Aux Output Parameters

Aux Output 1, 2, 3, 4 Confirmation Enable
Aux Output Confirmation Enable set to 1 enables a confirmation signal for completion of
each Auxiliary M-code Output. The program pauses until the confirmation signal is
detected. A setting of 0 will not require a confirmation signal and will not pause the
program during the Auxiliary M-code Output.

The default setting for each Auxiliary Output Confirmation Enable is 0.

Disable Aux Out 1, 2, 3, 4 During Interrupt

When set to 1, the parameter Disable Aux Output During Interrupt disables the specified
Auxiliary M-code Output when an Interrupt cycle is selected during Auto Run mode. Upon
return to Auto Run mode, the Auxiliary M-code Output will automatically be re-enabled.
However, if another mode is selected, then the Auxiliary M-code Output will remain
disabled until activated again in Auto Run mode.

A setting of 0 will leave the Auxiliary M-code Output enabled when an Interrupt cycle is
selected during Auto Run mode. It will remain enabled after exit from Interrupt cycle,
even when accessing a mode other than Auto Run.

The default setting for Disable Aux Out During Interrupt is 0 (enable).

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-25

Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC
When the Move to Safety Post Manual Mode ATC operations parameter is set to 0 for an
ATC command, the Z axis moves to tool change height and the ATC is completed at the
current X and Y axis position.

The default setting for Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC is 0 (disable).

If this parameter is set to 1, then:

1. The Z axis moves at rapid to zero.

2. The X and Y axes move at rapid to the X- and Y-axis safety positions.
3. The Z axis moves to tool change height.
4. The automatic tool change is completed.
5. The Z axis moves to zero.
6. The X and Y axes move at rapid back to the previous X and Y position.

Chip Conveyor Parameters

Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable, Chip Conveyor On Delay Time
and Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time parameters are functional only
when the Chip Removal Forward On/Off F2 softkey (Automatic
Run Mode) is set to On.

Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable

The Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable parameter is used with the Chip Conveyer On
Delay Time and Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time parameters to periodically allow the chip
conveyor or auger to remove chips from inside the machine during the part program.

When Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable is set to 0, this parameter is disabled. Values
entered into the Chip Conveyor On Delay Time and Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time will not
be retained.

When Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable is set to 1, use the Chip Conveyor On Delay
Time and Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time parameters to regulate operation of the chip
conveyor or auger.

The default setting for Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable is 0 (disable).

Chip Conveyor On Delay Time

When the Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable parameter is set to 1, the Chip Conveyor
On Delay Time parameter defines the time that the chip conveyor or auger cycles On to
remove chips from inside the enclosure.

The default setting for Chip Conveyor On Delay Time is 0 seconds.

Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time

When the Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable parameter is set to 1, the Chip Conveyor

3 - 26 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Off Delay Time parameter sets the time that the chip conveyor or auger cycles Off. When
the chip conveyor or auger cycles Off, the screen status display is FWD-Delay, not
Stopped.

The default setting for Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time is 0 seconds.

Select the Page 4 F4 softkey to access Machine Parameters Page 4:

Figure 3–5. Machine Parameters, Page 4

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-27

Machine Parameters - Page 4
Parameter Description Range Default

Warm-Up Cycle Time Sets the time for each step of the warm- 60-600 120
Per Pass up cycle.

Warm-Up Starting Sets the spindle speed for the initial step 0-25% 1000
Speed of the warm-up cycle. Max RPM

Warm-Up Speed Sets spindle speed increments for each 0-25% 2000
Steps step of the warm-up cycle. Max RPM

Warm-Up Max Sets the spindle speed for the final step 0-Max RPM Machine’s
Spindle Speed of the warm-up cycle. maximum
spindle RPM

Warm-Up Axis Feed Sets the axis feed rate for each step of 0-Max 2920
Rate the warm-up cycle. Rapid

Disable Auto On Chip Disables chip conveyor from turning on 0-1 0

Removal automatically in AUTO mode.

Axis Feedrate Sets the Axis Feedrate Override Minimum 0-99% 10%
Override Min (%) value.

Axis Feedrate Not accessible by the user. Contact a 101-200 150

Override Max (%) Hurco Certified Service representative for
assistance.

Rapid Feedrate Sets the Rapid Feedrate Override 0-200% 10%

Override Min (%) Minimum value.

Rapid Feedrate Not accessible by the user. Contact a 0-200 100

Override Max (%) Hurco Certified Service representative for
assistance.

Dual Tool Probe Sets tool probe in one or both zones of 0 (one) 0
Present dual-zone machines. 1 (both)

Enable Retract Z- Enables Z-axis retract upon power loss, 0 (disable) 0

Axis on Power Loss when an M91 is present. 1 (enable)

3 - 28 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Warm Up Parameters
These parameters allow the operator to configure the machine’s daily warm-up cycle.

• Warm-up Cycle Time Per Pass

• Warm-up Starting Speed
• Warm-up Speed Steps
• Warm-up Max Spindle Speed
• Warm-up Axis Feed Rate

The Z-axis is at zero and does not move during the machine warm-
up. Tool In Spindle setting must be 0 before beginning Warm Up
Machine. For the VM1G machine, a tool must be in the spindle before
beginning Warm Up Machine.

When the warm-up cycle is initiated:

• Spindle speeds up to the Warm-up Starting Speed RPM for the time indicated
in the Warm-up Cycle Time per Pass field.
• X and Y axes move diagonally from corner to corner at the Warm-up Axis
Feed Rate.
• The machine then steps through the warm-up cycle until the Warm-up Max
Spindle Speed is reached. The length of each step is defined by the Warm-Up
Cycle Time per Pass. During each step of the cycle, the spindle speed will
increase to the Warm-up Speed Steps RPM and the axes will run at the
Warm-up Axis Feed Rate.

Altering the default daily warm-up parameters may lead to

inadequate machine warm up that can negatively impact spindle
operations and may void the Hurco warranty.

See Machine Warm-up for warm-up cycles for a new spindle or a

machine that was idle 30 days or more.

Disable Auto On Chip Removal

The Disable Auto On Chip Removal parameter disables the chip conveyor from turning on
automatically in Auto Mode. The range is 0 or 1; 0 is the default. Setting the parameter to
1 will disable the Auto On Chip Removal feature.

Axis Feedrate Override Min (%)

Sets the Axis Feedrate Override Minimum value. This value cannot be greater than or equal to
the maximum value.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-29

Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%)
Sets the Rapid Feedrate Override Minimum value. This value cannot be greater than or
equal to the maximum value.

Dual Tool Probe Present

The Dual Tool Probe Present parameter sets tool probe in one or both zones of dual-zone
machines. 0 specifies there is one tool probe; 1 specifies there is a probe in each zone.
The default is 0.

Enable Retract Z-Axis on Power Loss

Enables Z-axis retract on power loss. 0 disables the retract feature. 1 enables the Z-axis
retract feature. Default is 0.

This parameter must be used in conjunction with M90/M91. The Z-axis retracts upon
power loss when this parameter is set to 1 and an M90 code (Z-axis Retract Enable) is
inserted at the beginning of the program. The retract can be turned on and off within the
program using M90 (on) and M91 (off).

The Z-axis will not retract if the M90 code is not used in the program
in conjunction with this parameter.

3 - 30 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Estimated Run Time Parameters
Use the Estimated Run Time Parameters to make adjustments to certain machine
operations in order to generate a more accurate estimated program run time.

The Compute Estimated Run Time function on the Auto screen provides an estimate of
the time it takes to run the current part program. Times entered on the Estimated Run
Time Parameters screens are used in the calculation of the overall program run time
estimate.

Select the Estimated Run Time softkey from the Machine Parameters screens to view and
enter Estimated Run Time Parameters. The values are saved upon exit.

Figure 3–6. Estimated Run Time Parameters for a horizontal milling machine

The available parameters are dependent on machine type.

See Auto Mode, on page 5 - 27 for information about the Compute

Estimated Run Time softkey.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-31

Serial Port Settings
Serial Port Settings allows you to set Port 1 and Port 2 settings for protocol, baud rate,
character length, stop bits, and parity. The following fields appear on the Serial Port
Settings screen. Refer to your hardware documentation for your equipment’s specific
settings.

• Protocol—The format in which the data is communicated. Choose from CTS/

RTS (hardware flow control), Xon/Xoff (software flow control), and Full
Handshake.
• Baud Rate—The communication speed rate. Choose a baud rate that is
appropriate for your network from the drop-down list.
• Character Length—The maximum number of bits sent back and forth at one
time.
• Stop Bits—Stop bits signal the end of the transmission of data. Choose the
size for the Stop Bit.
• Parity—Provides simple error checking for the transmitted data.

Select Even if the data bits plus the parity bit result in an even number of 1's

Select Odd if the data bits plus the parity bit result in an odd number of 1’s.

Select None if there is no parity bit included in the transmission. When No is

selected, its assumed that there are other forms of checking that will detect
any errors in transmission.

For example, suppose the data bits 01110001 are transmitted to your
computer. If even parity is selected, then the parity bit is set to 0 by the
transmitting device to produce an even number of 1's. If odd parity is
selected, then the parity bit is set to 1 by the transmitting device to produce
an odd number of 1's.

3 - 32 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

FTP Server Settings
The WinMax console can serve as an FTP Server. The following fields appear on the FTP
Server Settings screen. For more information refer to the UltiMonitor chapter in the
Options manual.

• Enable FTP Server—Enable the WinMax Control to act as an FTP Server.

• FTP Server Port—The port number for FTP access.
• Maximum Idle Time (Mins)—Maximum amount of time before connection
is dropped.
• User Name—The log in name that will allow users access to the FTP Server.
• Password—The password that corresponds to the user name and allows
access to the FTP Server.
• Path—The file path that the users will be allowed access to.

WinMax Uptime
The WinMax Uptime screen displays the start date time and runtime for the current
session of Winmax.

Rotary Axes Parameters

Set the General Rotary Axes Parameters on this screen:

• Part Kinematics Z Reference—enter or store the Z axis position for the

Part Kinematics Z Reference location.
• Rotary Axis ISO Standard—specifies if the positive direction of the rotary
axis matches the ISO standard.
• Tilt Axis Preference—specifies the tilt axis preference: neutral, positive, or
negative. Neutral indicates no preference.

Set the specific A, B, C axes parameters (depending on configuration) by selecting the

A/B/C Axis softkeys:

• Rotary Centerline X/Y/Z—enter the machine coordinate for the center of

rotation.
• Automatic Centerline Calculation—specify Yes or No to enable automatic
centerline calculation.
• Machine Coordinate Relative—specify if the axis coordinates are machine
relative.

For dual-zone machines, parameters can be set for each zone, on the Zone 1 and Zone 2
tabs.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-33

Select Language
Select and register a language on the Language Selection screen:

1. Select a language from the list.

2. Press the Load Language softkey to install the Language files. You can also
press the F1 key to perform this function. The selected language is shown in
the Current Language field.

Language Quick Toggle

You can toggle between two languages from any screen in WinMax using the Language
Quick Toggle feature. To set the primary and secondary languages, highlight a language
in the list and select the Set as Toggle Language 1 (for primary language) or Set as
Toggle Language 2 (for secondary language). The selected languages are shown at the
top of the screen:

Figure 3–7. Language Selection screen

Use Ctrl+L on the keyboard (or virtual keyboard) to switch back and forth between the
languages on any screen in WinMax.

Data Logging Filters

Used for diagnostic purposes only.

3 - 34 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Tool Path Support
Used for service purposes; requires a password to access.

Additional Utilities Softkeys

• Printing Setup F3—set printing preferences for program blocks, range of
program blocks, program parameters, part setup, and tool setup.
• Integrator Support Services F4—for diagnostics and machine configuration;
password required for access.
• Restart Control F5—exits all control operations, powers down, then restarts
machine and control.
• Shutdown Control F6—exits all control operations and powers down machine.
• Serial I/O F1—to begin read/write program operations using screenport 1 or
2.
• Log Files F2—displays error and status messages that have occurred during
normal operation.

Printing Setup
The Printing Setup F3 softkey on the main Utilities screen provides access to the following
printing functions:

• Part Program Printing—print part program elements.

• Tool Information Printing—print the Tool Library or save it to file.
• Probing Data Printing—print probing part inspection files.
• Serial Numbers Printing—print a report that lists used Serial Numbers.

Part Program Printing

In the Part Program Printing screen you can choose to print some or all of the following
elements:

• Program Blocks (all or a range)

• Program Parameters
• Part Setup
• Tool Setup

After checking the desired elements, select the PRINTING F3 softkey. A pop-up window
appears that contains the selected data. The information can be viewed by selecting the

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-35

heading to expand the section; select the heading again to hide the information. The
following softkeys appear in the pop-up window:

• Print Preview—displays the part program information as it will appear when

printed.
• Print—sends the information to the printer.
• Save As—saves the information as a text file to an external drive.
• Close—closes the pop-up window.

Tool Information Printing

Tool Information Printing is available only with the Tool and Material
Library option.

The TOOL INFORMATION PRINTING F6 softkey on the Tool Utilities and Settings screen
allows you to view and print tool information for all tools saved in the Tool Library:

Print tool list

Save tool list

Figure 3–8. Tool Information and Printing

Select the PRINT button on the Tool Information pop-up to print a list of tools and
settings, as in the following example:

ATC
Tool Number: 23
Tool Type: Ball End Mill
Tool Diameter is 0.0938 inches.
Tool length is 0.5625 inches.
Length of cut is 0.4688 inches.
Number of flutes is 0 inches.
Direction of Spindle Rotation is Clockwise.
Helix Angle is 0°.

3 - 36 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Shank Diameter is 0.0938 inches.
Apt Gear Ratio is 1.
Apt Tool Number is 1.
Apt Diameter Offset is 1.
Apt Length offset is 1.
Simulation Color is SEQUENTIAL.

MTC
Tool Number: 1
Tool Type: Drill
Tool Diameter is 0.031 inches.
Tool length is 5 inches.
Length of cut is 5 inches.
Number of flutes is 0 inches.
Direction of Spindle Rotation is Clockwise.
Drill Angle is 118.000000°.
Helix Angle is 0°.
Shank Diameter is 0.031 inches.
Apt Gear Ratio is 1.
Apt Tool Number is 1.
Apt Diameter Offset is 1.
Apt Length offset is 1.
Simulation Color is SEQUENTIAL.

Tool Number: 20
Tool Type: Cutting Tap
Tool Diameter is 0.216 inches.
Tool length is 1.296 inches.
Length of cut is 1.08 inches.
Tap Direction: Right Hand.
Tap Chamfer: Bottoming.
Thread Pitch is 0.0417 inches.
Thread Diameter is 0.216 inches.
Helix Angle is 0°.
Flute Style: Spiral Flute.
Shank Diameter is 0.216 inches.
Apt Gear Ratio is 1.
Apt Tool Number is 1.
Apt Diameter Offset is 1.
Apt Length offset is 1.
Simulation Color is SEQUENTIAL.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-37

Probing Data Printing
When Probing Part Inspection files are generated, they are saved to the same location
and with the same filename as the part program with a .TXT filename extension. For
example, the Part Inspection file for the program SAMPLE.HWM is SAMPLE.TXT. Part
Inspection files are printed from the control using the PROBING DATA PRINTING softkey:

1. Select the PRINTING SETUP F3 softkey from Utilities.

2. Select the PROBING DATA PRINTING F3 softkey.
3. Locate the Part Inspection file from the Locate Probing Data Files screen.
4. Select the PRINT F1 softkey to print the file.
Subsequent Part Inspection data from the same part program is
appended to the existing Part Inspection file for that program.

Serial Numbers Printing

You can print a report that lists the Serial Numbers already used in the part program:

1. Select the Printing Setup softkey from Utilities.

2. Select Serial Numbers Printing softkey.
3. The report is displayed in a pop-up window. Select the Print softkey.

Integrator Support Services

The Integrator Support Services screen requires a password to
access and is for Hurco Certified Technicians’ use in configuring and
setting up the machine.

3 - 38 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Serial I/O
Two serial ports are available on the control. The Serial I/O screen contains Status and
Bytes Transferred fields for both ports. In addition, there are read, write, and abort
softkeys for both ports.

These are the fields on the Serial I/O screen:

• Status—status of serial port.

• Bytes Transferred—number of bytes transferred.

These softkeys are available on the Serial I/O screen. Duplicate sets of fields and softkeys
are available on the Serial I/O screen for Port 1 and Port 2.

• Begin Reading from Port—brings up 2 softkey choices: READ NC FROM

PORT and READ CONV FROM PORT to identify the program format to read.
• Begin Writing to Port—writes the program to the port.
• Abort Port Operation—halts the read or write operation for the port.

Log Files
WinMax provides two log files that are accessed with the Log Files softkey, as well as
status and error listings:

• Active Error Listing, on page 3 - 39

• Active Status Listing, on page 3 - 40
• Error History, on page 3 - 40
• Status History, on page 3 - 41
• Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 3 - 41
• Export Log, on page 3 - 42

Active Error Listing

WinMax provides a list of the most recent error messages displayed, up to a maximum of
200 messages. Review messages when troubleshooting or to determine if a problem
recurs.

These are the softkeys on the Active Error Listing screen:

• Previous Page F1—displays the error messages on the previous page of the
Active Error Listing.
• Next Page F2—displays the error messages on the next page of the Active
Error Listing.
• Clear All F4—clears all error messages from the Active Error Listing.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-39

Active Status Listing
The Active Status Listing screen displays current machine status messages. Each item
will include time/date stamp, language file, language file index and the machine status
message currently active in the system. Examples are messages such as “MOTION HOLD
HAS BEEN DEPRESSED,” or “LOW LUBE LEVEL.” As each status changes back to a normal
state, it will be removed from the list (see Status History, on page 3 - 41).

Example:

10:53:39, STATUS.WRC, 32

CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN.

These are the softkeys on the Active Status Listing screen:

• Previous Page F1—displays the status messages on the previous page of

the Active Error Listing.
• Next Page F2—displays the status messages on the next page of the Active
Error Listing.
• Clear All F4—clears all status messages from the Active Status Listing.

Error History
The Error History screen displays a list of all system errors since the last power up (see
Active Error Listing, on page 3 - 39). A plus sign “+” indicates when the error occurred
and a minus sign “-” indicates when the error was cleared.

Examples:

Error occurred:

10:53:40, ERROR.WRC, 110, +

SERVO FAULT – Z AXIS.

Error cleared:

10:57:32, ERROR.WRC, 110, -

SERVO FAULT – Z AXIS.

The history will also display part program errors generated during programming
(interpreter errors). These errors will not display in the Active Error Listing since they are
transient.

Example:

11:39:21, COMPILER.WRC, 3, +

ERROR IN BLOCK 1: TOOL 1 IS AN INVALID TOOL NUMBER.

3 - 40 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Status History
The Status History screen displays a list of all system messages since the last power up
(see Active Status Listing, on page 3 - 40). A plus sign “+” indicates when the status
went active and a minus sign “-” indicates when the status returned to normal.

Examples:

Status went active:

10:53:39, STATUS.WRC, 32, +

CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN.

Status returned to normal: Log F

10:54:27, STATUS.WRC, 32, -

CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN.

Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files

When the Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files softkey is selected, a file manager screen
opens with access to Log and Diagnostic files. Directories are displayed in the left pane;
these include AtcMapLog, Communications, DumpFiles, NavErr, NavTap, NavESTOP,
Profiles, ScreenCaptures, and ThreadMonitor. Select a directory to see its contents (the
files) displayed in the right pane. To help distinguish between files, view the date and
time they were created, which is displayed in the Date column.

When it is necessary to copy certain files for service purposes, follow these steps:

Due to the large size of some of the files, it is recommended to copy

them from the Hurco machine to a USB flash memory device (128M
or larger).

1. Attach the USB flash memory device to the external connector on the
communications port on the machine.
2. Select the appropriate directory from the left-hand pane and select the file(s)
you wish to copy from the right-hand pane.
3. Select the COPY softkey.
4. In the left-hand pane, select the USB flash memory device (will probably
indicate it is E drive in parentheses).
5. Select the PASTE softkey. The files are now on the USB flash memory device,
and can be transferred to a PC to be emailed.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Utilities 3-41

Export Log
The Export Log displays data that is lost or changed when a program is exported from
WinMax (.HWM) to another format (.HD3, .FNC, etc.). Each time a program is exported
from .HWM to another format, the data from the most recent export is displayed and the
older data is erased.

These are the softkeys on the Export Log screen:

• Previous Page F1—displays the previous page if log is longer than one
page.
• Next Page F2—displays the next page if log is longer than one page.
• Clear All F4—erases all information from the Export Log.

3 - 42 Utilities 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

PROGRAMMING BASICS
The following sections explain basic programming information for Conversational and NC
programming, such as required setup, program checking, editing, and running of the
program.

Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
Tool Calibration Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
Tool Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Part Program Tool Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 34
Tool Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39
Tool and Material Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
Import / Export Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 53
Copy and Change Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 56
Review Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 59
Manual Safety Override Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 61
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 64

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-1

Input Mode
Input mode is used for part and tool setup, part programming, setting parameters, and
other information entry. Press the Input key on the console to access the Input screen.

The following softkeys appear on the Input screen:

• Part Setup F1—access the Part Setup screen to establish part zero,
centerline, offset Z, safety work region, and other parameters.
• Tool Review F2—access the Tool Review screen for a summary listing of all
tools used in active program (see Part Program Tool Review, on page 4 - 34
for more information).
• Part Programming F3—access and create data blocks of a part program.
The current program's data blocks appear on screen when this softkey is
used. Delete, add, edit, and navigate through the data blocks. (See Part
Programming in the Conversational Programming manual for more
information.) The NC editor is displayed for NC programs.
• Program Parameters F4—access General, Milling, Holes, Probing, and
Performance parameters. NC parameters are accessible for NC programs.
• Import / Export Functions F5—import parts of a previously saved
Conversational program or NC state, export NC state to file, or import/export
the tool library.
• Copy and Change Blocks F6—make changes to several blocks at one time
and/or copy and change blocks within the active program.
• Erase Functions F7—erase sections of the current program.
• Program Manager F8—access and manage other part programs.

Erase Functions
Erase functions erases (deletes) programs or components (part setup, tool setup, and
program parameters).

New WinMax features are:

• ERASE PART SETUP F1—resets Part Setup to the default values.

• ERASE TOOL SETUP F2—deletes tools in Manual Tools, Auto Tools, and
spindle.
The Erase Tool Setup softkey deletes ALL tools from the control, and
cannot be undone.

• RESET PROGRAM PARAMETERS F3—resets Program Parameters to the

default values.
• ERASE PROGRAM F4—deletes the part program data blocks but retains the
program name.
• UNLOAD PROGRAM F5—removes program from the Program Manager,
including the filename. This does the same function as CLOSE PROGRAM in
the Program Manager.

4 - 2 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Part Setup
See also:

Part Setup Fields, on page 4 - 9

Part Setup Softkeys, on page 4 - 12

Part setup establishes the locations of part zero in X, Y, and Z relative to the machine's
absolute zero. Part Zero may be located anywhere on the fixturing or the part. During
machine calibration, each axis moves to its + or - travel limits. Machine zero, identified
during machine calibration, is the location to which each axis moves to determine a fixed
point where the X, Y, and Z axes become tangent. This value does not change after
calibration.

1 Part Zero

2 Workpiece

3 Machine Zero

4 X Axis

5 Y Axis

Figure 4–1. Part Zero Relative to Machine Zero Viewed Looking Down at Table

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-3

Program the axes to move within the coordinate system as shown below:

-X Table moves to the left

+X Table moves to the right

-Y Table moves toward the operator

+Y Table moves away from the operator

-Z Spindle moves down and into the part

+Z Spindle moves up and away from the part

Figure 4–2. Axis Motion

The location of part zero in Z is established during tool calibration. During setup, the tool
zero calibration plane is established for each tool. The program dimensions for a part are
relative to these points, viewed facing the machine, as shown below:

1 Table

2 Part (workpiece)

3 Machine Absolute - Z Axis

4 Tool Zero Calibration Plane

Figure 4–3. Part Zero in Z (Tool Zero Calibration Plane)

Select the Toggle Units softkey to change between inch and metric units of
measurement.

4 - 4 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Part Setup Coordinate Systems
Machine Coordinate System
The Machine Coordinate System is fixed to the machine frame and does not move when
the machine axes move. This coordinate system is located at the spindle nose center
when all machine axes are at their zero positions.

Unrotated Coordinate System

The Unrotated Part Coordinate System is present on a 4-axis or 5-axis machine and is
located at the Workpiece Coordinate system when all the machine’s axes are at their Part
Setup Zero locations. This coordinate system moves with the machine’s linear axes, but
does not rotate with the rotary axes. The Unrotated Coordinate system is generally used
only by NC Post Processors that do not use Tool Center Point Management.

Workpiece Coordinate System

The Workpiece Coordinate System is fixed to the physical workpiece fixtured to the table;
it moves and rotates when the machine axes move.The coordinate system is fixed to the
part fixtured on the machining center’s table. The Workpiece Coordinate System is
typically set in the user’s CAD/CAM system or on the part drawing used for programming
the tool paths.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-5

The Machine Coordinate, Workpiece Coordinate, and Unrotated Coordinate systems are
shown in the figure below:

1 Machine Coordinate System

2 Unrotated Part Coordinate System

3 Workpiece Coordinate System

Figure 4–4. Part Setup Coordinate Systems

4 - 6 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

5-Axis Part Setup Fields
Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a 5-Axis Part Setup
video demonstration:

Video Demonstrations at www.hurco.com

Scroll to the bottom of the page and select the video to download.
Internet connection is required.

The Part Setup screen for a 5-axis machine contains these fields:

• Z Table Offset—directional distance from the C-axis table to the X-Y plane of
the Workpiece Coordinate System, on page 4 - 5. Z Table Offset is positive in
the part setup shown in the figure below.
• Offset Z—directional distance from Zero Calibration (described below) to the
X-Y plane of the Workpiece Coordinate System, on page 4 - 5. Offset Z is
positive in the part setup shown in the figure below.
• Zero Calibration, the tool calibration height, is also used to set up a part on
a 5-axis machine. Zero Calibration is defined on the Tool Setup screen. Zero
Calibration is positive in the part setup shown in the figure below; however, in
the NC Tool Offsets table it is negative.
• Ensure that the B-axis angle is at zero degree when measuring Z
Table Offset, Offset Z, and Zero Calibration fields for 5-axis
machining.
• For conversational programs, B-axis Part Setup Offset must be
zero degree.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-7

 1 Workpiece Coordinate System

2 Zero Calibration (positive value)

3 Offset Z (positive value)

4 Z Table Offset (positive value)

Figure 4–5. 5-Axis Part Setup

4 - 8 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Part Setup Fields
Depending on machine configuration, the Part Setup screen contains the following fields:

• Part Zero X / Y —defines the X and Y locations in machine coordinates for

part zero.
• Part Zero Z (Absolute Tool Length Mode)—defines the distance from
Machine Zero to the workpiece Z0 of the part. This field defaults to zero for all
new programs. See Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 4 - 17 for more
information.
• Touch the top of workpiece with the tip of a calibrated tool and select the
Calculate Part Z with Current Tool softkey. The value is automatically
entered into the field as the distance from the touch-off gauge block to
the workpiece.
• To add an offset, add or subtract a value from the Part Zero Z value.
If this field is not set before running a part program, tools will plunge
to the gauge block height.

• Part Zero A / B /C—defines the A, B, C locations of Rotary coordinates for

part zero.
• Disable Centerlines (rotary configurations only)—disables the use of rotary
axis centerline data. When set to Yes, the centerline fields (below) are not
available. Default is No.
• A /B /C Centerline X / Y / Z—defines incremental distances from true part
zero. Program these values in order to draw the program properly on the
Graphics screen.
For rotary programs, Hurco recommends automatically calculating
the rotary centerline. See Rotary Part Setup in the Options manual
for more information.

• Part Zero Z Shift (Absolute Tool Length mode)—defines a global offset

to Part Zero value in Z.
• Offset Z (Zero Calibration Mode)—defines an offset dimension relative to
the tool’s Zero Calibration value. This field defaults to 0 so that the tool tip of
all calibrated tools will be at the same Z=0 in the program. Offset Z is
combined with all of the program’s tool calibration points and the Z Top and Z
Bottom of the Safety Work Region.
• To use Store Position softkey or button, calibrated tool previously defined
in Tool Setup for this program must be in the spindle.
• Entering a value in the Offset Z field adds or subtracts the amount of the
offset to/from the Tool Calibration value. For example, you can adjust all
Tool Calibration values in the Z axis and Z Start to compensate for part
thickness by changing the Offset Z value without recalibrating each tool.
• The Include Offset Z in Tool Zero Cal parameter indicates if Offset Z is
added to the Zero Calibration value when tool calibration is set using
Store Machine Position. See General Parameters 2, on page 4 - 44 for
more information.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-9

 1 Table

2 Workpiece

3 Reference gauge block

4 Offset Z (Zero Calibration)

Part Zero Z (Absolute Tool Length)

Figure 4–6. Offset Z or Part Zero Z

• Safety Work Region—defines a part-relative safety area to prevent the

cutting tool from colliding with fixtures or other equipment. The Safety Work
Region created in Part Setup is saved with a conversational part program; the
Safety Work Region is not saved with NC programs.

Use the Safety Work Region fields on the Part Setup screen to enter values to
define the safety region. Type the value in the field, or jog each axis to the
desired safety region, and press the Store Position button on the jog unit.

Out of range entries in the Safety Work Region appear in red. See Machine
Specifications for ranges.

Always enter the Z(-) parameter (Z Bottom) to prevent the tool from
drilling through the part and into the table.

Use the Z(+) field (Z Top) to define the clearance above the part and
fixture.

Use the Z(+) field with a Position block. The Z Top value reduces
rapid Z motion for Position blocks. The spindle retracts to the Z Top
value above the tool zero calibration for Position blocks.

4 - 10 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

The figure below translates these fields into the Safety Work Region:

1 Part Zero

Figure 4–7. Safety Work Region

• Z Table Offset (Zero Calibration Mode)—specifies the part offset in Z

direction relative to the table top.
• X/Y Skew (Deg)—represents, in degrees, how far the part is from perfect
alignment with the table.
• Zone (dual-zone machining)—specifies the zone for dual-zone machines.
• 1 = Zone 1 (the left-side zone when facing the machine).
• 2 = Zone 2 (the right-side zone when facing the machine).
• 0 = the current zone. Zone 0 can be used when dual zones are enabled
but you do not need to run the program in a particular zone. Setting the
Zone field to 0 will run the program in the zone that the spindle currently
occupies.

Digital Read Out (DRO)

The DRO is displayed at the top of the Part Setup screen (it also appears at the top of the
Tool Setup and Manual Mode screens). The DRO shows the real-time position of the axes
and machine status. The current zone is displayed for dual-zone machines. The Machine
and Part position information in the DRO will not appear if the machine is not calibrated.
These are the DRO fields (fields are dependant on the machine mode displayed):

• Zone (dual-zone machines only)—displays the current zone.

• Machine and Part Axes—displays the current position of all axes.
• Opt Stop On (Off)—displays the status (on or off) of the Optional Stop for
NC programs.
• Orientation—the orientation of the axes.
• Chip Removal—displays the status of the chip auger.
• Tool in Spindle—displays the tool number of the tool in the spindle.
• Spindle—displays the current spindle speed.
• Feed—displays the current feed rate.
• Program Run Time—displays the time the program has been running.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-11

 • F(%)—displays the current Feedrate per Minute percentage set on the axis
Feed Rate knob.
• R(%)—displays the current Rapid Traverse Feedrate percentage set on the
Rapid override knob.
• S(%)—displays the current spindle RPM percentage set on the Spindle
Speed override knob.
• Magazine—indicates the current pocket.
• Axes Status—shows the axes status (calibrated or uncalibrated).
• Axis Limit Switches—displays the status of the machine’s limit switches as
each axis calibrates.

To access the configurable DRO view, select the Auxiliary button, and choose the Launch
DRO softkey.

Part Setup Softkeys

Part Setup contains these softkeys:

• Work Offsets—Accesses the work coordinates G54-G59 and a set of shift

values for NC programs. These are used to set multiple part zeroes for
multiple parts fixtured to the table and milled consecutively using the same
program.
• Tool Setup—Accesses Tool Setup screen to enter the descriptions of tools that
will be used in the part program.
• Part Programming—Accesses fields to enter the exact description of how
the part will be cut. See Part Programming in the Conversational
Programming manual for more information.
• Program Parameters—Accesses the Program Parameters screen to specify
data common to all program data blocks.
• Part Probing—Accesses the Probing parameters screen (available only with
the Probing option).
• Store Machine Position—Sets the current axis position as a Part Zero
location. The cursor location determines which axis (X or Y) will be set.

These are the softkeys on the second Part Setup screen, accessed with the More 
softkey:

• Stock Geometry—Accesses fields to specify the dimensions of the stock

material so it displays properly in graphics.
• Calculate Rotary Offsets—Calculates centerline offsets for rotary
programs.
• Orient Spindle—Allows the spindle to be positioned for tool insertion or
removal.
• Toggle Units—Changes units from metric to imperial and vice versa.

4 - 12 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Part Fixturing and Tool Loading
Before entering data into the part and tool setup screens for a part program, first fixture
the work piece to the table and load a tool into the spindle.

In order to determine the starting point (part zero) in the part, first fixture the work piece
(raw material or stock) to the machine tool table. This process, called fixturing, can be
accomplished using a variety of clamping devices, such as vises and toe clamps. Select
the fixturing device that will hold the work piece securely without getting in the way of
the cutting tool while the part is being made.

You may want to insert a tool in the spindle to use as an edge finder when identifying part
zero. Press the Manual button in the Machine Mode grouping to display the Manual
screen. Use the Tool in Spindle field and softkey to enter the tool number for the edge
finder tool.

Insert this tool as described in Loading a Tool into the Spindle, on page 1 - 30. The tool
will need to be calibrated as described in Tool Setup, on page 4 - 21.

Work Offsets
When in NC mode, the Work Offsets softkey displays up to six work coordinates (G54-
G59) and a set of shift offset values. These are used to set multiple part zeroes for
multiple parts fixtured to the table and milled consecutively using the same program.

The X, Y, Z, and optional Rotary A and B work offset values can be entered for G54 to G59
codes. The coordinates defining G54 are the part zero coordinates for the original part
defined on the Part Setup screen. When the G54 coordinates are changed on this screen,
the part setup is also changed.

These work offsets are stored in memory, but not with the part program. They are not
saved to a disk file and need to be re-entered.

The shift offset coordinates, which follow the six work coordinates on the screen, move all
of the part zero coordinates as a group. This incremental value is useful when you place
part fixtures on the table in a different location and want to shift all of the work offsets to
the newly fixtured location. The G54-G59 offset values do not change on the screen when
shift offset values are entered.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-13

For dual-zone machines, specify the zone for each offset:

Set zone for each

work offset

Figure 4–8. Work Offsets on a dual-zone machine

Values for the Zone field are:

• 0—zone undefined (the active zone when only one is in use)

• 1—Zone 1
• 2—Zone 2

Auxiliary Work Offsets

There are 93 additional X, Y, Z, and optional Rotary A and B work offsets available on the
AUX WORK OFFSETS screen. These are accessed with the Aux Work Offsets F6 softkey
on the WORK OFFSETS screen.

To access any of these offsets call G code G54.1 Pn, where n is 1 thru 93. For example,
to change to auxiliary work offset 46 you would call G54.1 P46 in your NC program.

To update work offset values, use data setting G code G10 L20 Pn to set the Auxiliary
work offsets values. For example, to update work offset 46 value call G10 L20 P46
X12.5 Y3.0 Z-0.5

Following is a sample NC program that uses Auxiliary Work Offsets:

%
G90G80
T1M6F100
G10 L20 P1 X1 Y1 Z.-1
G10 L20 P93 X10 Y10 Z-.1
G54.1 P1 (change work part setup to 1)
G1X0.Y0.Z0.
X1.

4 - 14 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Y1.
X0.
Y0.
G54.1 P93 (change work part setup to 93)
G1X0.Y0.Z0.
X1.
Y1.
X0.
Y0.
M02

Stock Geometry
STOCK GEOMETRY F1 allows you to specify the dimensions of the stock material so it
displays properly in graphics (when Stock Outline field is enabled in Graphics Settings).

For dual-zone machines, choose Zone 1 or Zone 2 tab to specify stock geometry settings.

Fields are:

• Manual Stock Sizing—specify if you will manually set the stock dimensions.
When set to No, the software automatically sizes and positions the stock. To
calculate this, WinMax takes the diameter of the largest tool in the program
and adds 7/10ths of that size to the stock diameter X and Y fields (with a
minimum addition of .05).

When this field is set to Yes, you must enter the dimensions manually:

• Stock Type—specify Box or Cylinder:

• Box—enables settings for X length, Y length, Z length of stock box or
cube.
• Cylinder—enables direction, length, and radius of cylinder.
• Zero Ref—coordinate system zero from which to reference the stock zero
position.
• X Ref Position—locate the stock on X axis relative to the ZERO REF; can
use Store Position or can be set to Part Zero with softkey.
• Y Ref Position—locate the stock on Y axis relative to the ZERO REF; can
use Store Position or can be set to Part Zero with softkey.
• Z Ref Position—locate the stock on Z axis relative to the ZERO REF; can
use Store Position or can be set to Part Zero with softkey.
• X/Y/Z Length (available when Stock Type is Box)—specify lengths.
• Direction (available when Stock Type is Cylinder)—specify POS X, NEG X,
POS Y, NEG Y, POS Z, or NEG Z.
• Length (available when Stock Type is Cylinder)—specify length along axis
from reference position.
• Radius (available when Stock Type is Cylinder)—specify stock radius.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-15

 • Manual Border Sizing—specify if you will manually size the border
(available only when Manual Stock Sizing is set to NO).
• Border Size—specify stock border dimension (available only when
Manual Border Sizing is set to YES).
• Apply Border To Top (available when Manual Stock Sizing is set to NO)—
applies the automatically-calculated border to the top of the stock. The
border is automatically applied to the bottom.

4 - 16 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Tool Calibration Modes
Tool measurement and Part Setup Z measurements can be set with one of two modes:
Zero Calibration or Absolute Tool Length. The mode is selected in Utilities/User
Preferences/Tool Utilities and Settings. See Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3 - 8.

If a program’s tools were calibrated using one mode, and that

program is loaded into a control that is set to the other mode, a
message is displayed that the program’s tool calibrations cannot be
used. The program data is loaded, but the tool calibration data is
not; tool calibration fields are set to zero.

Absolute Tool Length mode

With the Absolute Tool Length method, the absolute length of the tool from the spindle
nose to the tip of the tool is stored in Tool Setup. Each tool used in a program should be
calibrated to the same gauge device set on table top. To use Absolute Tool Length Mode:

1. In the Tool Setup screen, enter the number of the tool to be calibrated into the
Tool Number field.
2. If the tool is in spindle, jog Z down to the gauge block.
3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or button on the Jog Unit.
4. Part Zero is stored separately in the Part Zero Z field in Part Setup and is the
distance from Machine Zero to the Z0 of the workpiece:
a. Select Part Setup softkey.
b. In Part Zero Z field, use calibrated tool to touch off Z0 of the workpiece and
select the Store Machine Position softkey or button on the jog unit.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-17

Setup of Gauge Device
To use Absolute Tool Length mode, you must define the Z location for the table top and
the touch off device(s). This needs to be done only once unless the touch off device
changes. Access the Tool Measurement screen with the Tool Measurement Settings
softkey on the 2nd set of Tool Setup softkeys (use the More softkey):

Figure 4–9. Tool Measurement screen

Tool Measurement fields are:

• Touch-Off Device—identifies the device to be used. The control allows up to

six devices.
• Device—defines the tool setter method: gauge block or tool probe, if
equipped.
• Height—specifies the height of gauge or probe relative to the Z Reference.
• Z Location— calculates the difference between Z Reference and the height
of the device.
• Notes—enter a description of the device specified.
• Z Reference—defines the machine reference position of the table top from
machine zero.

To set the Z Reference position:

1. Advance to Z Reference field.

2. Place a gauge of known length on table top.
3. Jog Z-axis down and carefully touch spindle nose to top of gauge block.
4. Select Store Machine Position softkey or press the store position button on
remote jog unit.
The Part Kinematics Z Reference value from Rotary Axes Parameters
may also be used as the Z Reference value by selecting the Set to
Part Kinematics Ref softkey.

4 - 18 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 5. Subtract the length of the gauge block from the value stored in Z Reference
field.
With Z Reference field highlighted, you can type in length of the
gauge block followed by enter. For example, if Z Reference measures
-562.259, using a 200 length gauge, type “200-” and enter to set Z
Reference to -762.259.

Once Z Reference is set it does not have to be changed or set again,

even if new devices are used. This field and the calculated Z Location
fields should not be edited.

To set up a gauge device:

1. In the Touch-Off Device field, select the device number to be used when
measuring tool length. Up to six different devices can be set, but only the one
currently selected in the Touch-Off Device field is active when setting tool
length.
2. Advance to the row number that corresponds to the touch-off device number.
3. In the Device column, select gauge.
4. In the Height column, enter the height of the gauge.
Z Location field will be automatically calculated by adding the height
to the Z Reference value. Do not edit Z Location column.

5. Multiple gauges can be set up by specifying height in the appropriate row (1-
6). However, the active device for measuring tool length is the one specified in
the Touch-Off Device field.
All values set in Tool Measurement Settings are retained in the
control and are applicable to all programs. They are not program
specific.

To set up a probe device:

1. Follow the steps to set up a single gauge device (for example, set up gauge for
device) and set touch-off device to Device 1.
2. In Tool Setup, use any tool to touch-off on the Device 1 gauge.
3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or Store Position button on jog unit.
4. In Tool Measurement Screen, select the touch-off device to be used when
probing tool length.
5. In the appropriate row, select Probe as the device from the drop-down Device
list.
6. Jog the tool down to the probe until probe is engaged.
7. With cursor in the Z Location column, select Store Position button on jog unit
or Store Z Location softkey. This will calculate the height of the probe from Z
Reference.

Also see Tool Probing in Options for more information.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-19

Zero Calibration Mode
With the Zero Calibration method of tool measurement, tools are calibrated to a plane in
the Z-axis as referenced from the Z Home position. Each tool used in a program should
be calibrated to the same plane. To use Zero Calibration mode:

1. In the Tool Setup screen, enter the number of the tool to be calibrated into the
Tool Number field.
2. If the tool is in spindle, jog Z down to the reference plane or gauge block.
3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or button on the Jog Unit.
All tools should be calibrated to the same reference plane.

4. If the reference plane is not the same as Z=Part Zero for program depth:
a. Select Part Setup softkey.
b. In Offset Z field, enter distance from reference plane to Part Zero, or use
calibrated tool to touch off Z=0 plane and select the Store Machine Position
softkey or button on the Remote Jog Unit.

If the plane that all tools are touched off of is the top of the workpiece, all program
dimensions for Z will be from Z=0. If the plane is not the top of the workpiece (as when
a gauge block is used), the operator can use the Offset Z field in Part Setup to set the
distance from the gauge block or other plane to the top of the workpiece plane. See Part
Setup, on page 4 - 3 for more information.

4 - 20 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Tool Setup
Use the Tool Setup screen to describe the tools that will be used for the part program. You
can access this screen from either the Input screen or the Part Setup screen by selecting
the Tool Setup softkey.

To review all tools currently programmed, go to the Tool Review screen.

When running a previously created part program, Tool Setup must

be carefully checked to be certain the tools described for the old
program match the tools planned for the new program. If a tool
breaks or is not available when running a previously created part
program, the Tool Setup information must be changed.

See also:

Tool Setup Fields, on page 4 - 21 and Tool Setup Softkeys, on page 4 - 25

Tool Setup Fields

The DRO is displayed at the top of the Tool Setup screen. See Digital Read Out (DRO), on
page 4 - 11 for more information.

The Tool Setup fields are defined as follows (note that not all fields appear on the screen
for all tools):

• Tool Number—Identifies the number of the programmed tool.

• For a new program, enter a new number in the Tool Number field and
move to another field to display Tool Setup fields.
• After at least one tool has been programmed, can add another tool:
• Enter new tool in Tool Number field.
• Use right arrow to create next available numeric tool number.
• The range of possible tool numbers is 1 through 9999 and is set in the
Tool Changer Specifications function in the Machine Specifications screen
in Utilities.
• The Next Tool and Previous Tool softkeys become available when more
than one tool has been programmed. Use these softkeys as appropriate to
access tool setup screens within a program.
Tool numbers do not necessarily correspond exactly to tool pot
numbers on the magazine of your ATC.

• Location—Identifies the physical location of the tool:

• Spindle—tool is in spindle
• Manual—tool is defined
• Auto—tool is in ATC magazine
• Pock—displays the tool pocket location of the tool

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-21

 • Tool Type—Identifies the type of tool. Use the appropriate softkey or drop-
down list to select a tool type. If you do not see the type of tool that you wish
to use, select the More  softkey to display more Type softkeys. The tool
types are:

Standard Tools WinMax-Only Tools

Drill Ream

Tap Spot Drill

Boring Head Forming Tap

End Mill Counter Bore

Face Mill Counter Sink

Ball End Mill Keyseat Mill

Back Spotface Drill Thread Mill (SC)

Probe Thread Mill (MC)

Gun Drill Corner Round Mill

Center Drill Dove Tail Mill

Chamfer Mill Engraving Mill

Bull Nose Mill Taper Radius End Mill

Custom Tool

• Diameter—Identifies the nominal diameter of the tool's cutting surface (i.e.,

the diameter before the tool suffers from normal wear).

The diameter range is 0 through 99.9999 inches/2539.997 mm. The

Diameter also appears on the Tool Geometry screen.

The programmed diameter is used to automatically determine cutter

compensation during milling operations. The system calculates the
radius of the cutting tool and automatically allows for this distance
when performing milling operations. This means it is not necessary
to remember the size of the cutting tool or manually calculate tool
offsets when programming the part.

• Zero Calibration (Zero Calibration Mode)—identifies Z-axis position of

the tool tip when positioned at workpiece or gauge block. A (P) is displayed if
the value is set by probing. See Zero Calibration Mode, on page 4 - 20 for
more information.
• Tool Cal Length (Absolute Tool Length mode)—identifies the length of
the tool from the spindle nose to the tip of the tool. See Absolute Tool Length
mode, on page 4 - 17 for more information.
• Touch-Off Device (Absolute Tool Length mode)—displays the touch off
device and type (gauge or probe) specified on the Tool Measurement screen.
Displayed for reference only; edited on the Tool Measurement screen.
• Shank Diameter—Appears when the tool type is Back Spotface and
represents the diameter of the tool shank.

4 - 22 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 • Thread Diameter—Appears when the tool type is Tap. Select the Tap icon,
located to the right of the field. Choose the appropriate diameter from the
pop-up box, as shown below:

Use the slider Select desired

to select range diameter

Touch to select

• TPI (or PITCH)—Appears when the tool type is Tap or Thread Mill (MC).
Threads per Inch (TPI) appears when the program’s unit of measurement is
inch. Pitch appears when millimeter is the selected unit of measurement. The
range is 0.0 through 1000.00 inches for TPI (0.0 to 2514.6 mm for Pitch).

If you enter a value for TPI, WinMax automatically calculates the Pitch. If you
enter a value for Pitch, WinMax calculates TPI. “CAL” appears next to the
calculated value.

• Speed (RPM)—Define the correct speed to be used for this tool, if known.
This value will be copied into each new data block in the part program that
uses this tool. If necessary, this parameter can be changed within the new
data block when programming the part.

The system uses the Speed (RPM) value to automatically calculate spindle
speeds for the tool.

You can manually change feed and speed values calculated by the control.

The range is set in Machine Specifications, on page 3 - 2 in Utilities.

• Coolant—Define the coolant, if any, to be used for the tool. Coolant is

programmable on a tool-by-tool basis. The softkey and drop-down list choices
change to Off, Primary, Secondary, or Both when the cursor is at the
Coolant field. Select Primary for machines equipped with a coolant system,
Secondary for machines equipped with a secondary coolant system (i.e.
through spindle coolant), and Both for machines with two coolant systems.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-23

 • Surface Speed (FPM)—Use for milling tools (drill, end mill, face mill, or ball
nosed end mill). The Surface Speed, Flutes, and Feed/Flute fields appear.
Enter a Surface Speed in feet per minute (or millimeters per minute), and the
Flutes and Feed/Flute fields appear. Enter values that indicate the number of
the flutes (teeth) on the tool and the feedrate per flute.

The system uses the values entered in Surface Speed, Flutes, and Feed/Flute
to automatically calculate the feeds and speeds for the tool.

You can manually change all feed and speed values calculated by the control.

• Flutes—Enter the number of cutting flutes for the tool. This entry will be
used to automatically calculate the Mill Feed in all data blocks for this part
program using this tool.

You can manually change all feed and speed values calculated by the control .

• Feed—Displays the default Mill Feed or Plunge Feed (depending on the tool
type). This value is calculated by the control, based on diameter, feed/flute,
and number of flutes for milling tools, or diameter and feed per revolution for
hole-making tools. The value can also be entered directly into the field.
• Feed/Flute (Tooth)—Enter the tool's chipload. This entry will be used to
automatically calculate the Mill Feed in all data blocks for this part program
using this tool.

You can manually change all feed and speed values calculated by the control.

• Cutting Time—displays the number of minutes a tool has been running in

the spindle (seconds are rounded up to the nearest minute). Starts at zero
unless a time is pre-set by the user (if there is already time on the tool).
When Tool Life Monitoring is enabled (in Tool Utilities and Settings) a second
field is also displayed, where the maximum cutting time for the tool can be
specified. See Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3 - 8 for more information.
• Diameter Wear—enter a number to compensate for tool wear.

Diameter Wear = (program tool diameter) - (actual tool diameter)

For example, to adjust a 0.5 inch diameter tool for .001 inch of wear, enter
.001 in the Diameter Wear field to set cutter comp diameter to 0.499 inches.

Compensate for tool wear in this field rather than the Tool Diameter
field. This will maintain the tool diameter and ensure accurate tool
matching with other part programs that use the same tool.

The Diameter Wear value alters the toolpath for cutter compensation. For
example, when milling a circle with Milling Type set to Outside, a positive
number in the Diameter Wear field will result in a smaller diameter cut, and a
negative number will result in a larger diameter cut.

If a probe is used to determine diameter, the Diameter Wear field will contain
the compensated value based on the probed diameter. A (P) appears next to
the Diameter Wear field to indicate that the value was derived from the
probed diameter.

4 - 24 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Tool Setup Softkeys
The Tool Setup Softkeys are as follows:

• Delete Tool—Deletes all program settings for the tool number entered in the
Tool Field, for a Manual tool. If the tool is in Spindle or Auto, this softkey is
not active.
• Part Setup—Accesses Part Setup screen. See Part Setup, on page 4 - 3 for
more information.
• Part Programming—Accesses fields to enter the exact description of how
the part will be cut. See Part Programming in the Conversational
Programming manual for more information.
• Tool Offsets—Available only for NC programs. The tool length offsets appear
on the screen. Tool offsets are tool lengths used to compensate tool length
without altering the NC program.

Tool offsets are not saved with the NC program.

• Use the Positive Tool Length Compensation (G43) or Negative Tool Length
Compensation (G44) codes. A G49 code specifies tool offset cancel. An
H00 also cancels an offset.
• The G43 and G44 codes set a mode of operation within the program that
is in effect until a G49 or H00 is used. If an H code is used without a G43
or G44, in effect, the value stored in the tool length offset table is used as
the calibrated tool length.
• If a zero is entered for the Tool Offset value (Tool Offset H Table), the
control uses the Tool Offset value entered in Tool Setup for the tool
length.
• If a value greater than zero is entered for the Tool Offset value (Tool
Offset H table), the control replaces the value set in Tool Setup with the
Tool Offset H Table value.
• The four keyboard arrows, Page Up, and Page Down keys scroll through
the 01 to 200 offsets.
• When the Store Machine Position softkey is pressed, a negative Z value
reflecting the Z axis machine position is entered on the screen.

• Tool Home—Allows you to move the tool quickly away from the part. Using
this softkey after Tool Calibration is much faster than pressing the axis jog
buttons on the jog unit. Press this softkey and then press the Start Cycle
button to move the spindle to the change height.
• Set Tool Zero (Zero Calibration mode)—stores the Z-axis position of the
tool tip when at workpiece or gauge block plane. To use this softkey, carefully
jog the tool in the spindle down to the top of the part or to the fixture defined
at the Tool Calibration point and then press the softkey. The system stores
the position of the tool into the current part program and the number appears
in the Zero Calibration field on the Tool Setup screen. This can also be
accomplished by pressing the Store Position button on the jog unit. On the
screen the part display for “Z” changes to zero. In Zero Calibration mode, all
tools used in a part program will need to be calibrated to the same plane.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-25

 A warning message is displayed if the edited tool is not the tool in
spindle. Select OK to store the current position for the tool that is
being edited. Select Cancel if you do not want to set tool zero for
that tool.

• Set Length Using Touch-Off Device (Absolute Tool Length mode)—

stores the tool length when using a gauge or other touch-off device. For a
gauge, carefully jog the tool in the spindle down to the top of the gauge and
select the softkey. The system stores the tool length in the Tool Cal Length
field.
This softkey is active when the following is true:

1. The Tool Probe Parameters Type field is set to No Tool

Probe. This field is accessed in Tool Setup:
a. Select the More softkey.
b. Select the Tool Probing softkey.
c. Select the Tool Probe Setup softkey.
2. The Part Probe Parameters Present field is set to Yes.
This field is accessed in Part Setup:
a. Select the Part Probing softkey.
b. Select the Part Probe Parameters softkey.

• Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block (Zero Calibration mode; Probing
only)—stores the Z-axis position of the tool tip when using a gauge block
into the Zero Calibration field and marks the tool as probed so it can be used
in Part Probing. To use this softkey, carefully jog the tool in the spindle down
to the top of the gauge at the Tool Calibration plane and press the softkey.
This softkey is active when the following is true:

1. The Tool Probe Parameters Type field is set to No Tool

Probe. This field is accessed in Tool Setup:
a. Select the More softkey.
b. Select the Tool Probing softkey.
c. Select the Tool Probe Setup softkey.
2. The Part Probe Parameters Present field is set to Yes.
This field is accessed in Part Setup:
a. Select the Part Probing softkey.
b. Select the Part Probe Parameters softkey.

• More —accesses second set of Tool Setup softkeys.

• Exit—exits the tool setup process and allows return to the Input screen.

4 - 26 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Second set of Tool Setup softkeys:

• Advanced Tool Settings—set Tool Geometry, Feed and Speed, Surface Finish
Quality, and other tool information.
• Change Tool Number—Allows you to change the tool number for the
current tool displayed. See Change Tool Number, on page 4 - 34 for more
information.
• Tool Probing—Accesses the Probing Parameters, on page 4 - 51. Probing is
available only with BMCs.
• Program Parameters—Accesses the program parameters.
• Part Program Tool Review—Accesses the tool review screen.
• Tool Measurement Settings (Absolute Tool Length mode)—accesses
the Tool Measurement screen where touch-off device height is set.
• More —Access first set of Tool Setup Softkeys.
• Exit—Exits the tool setup process and allows return to the Input screen.

Advanced Tool Settings

Tool Geometry, on page 4 - 28
Feed and Speed, on page 4 - 30
NC SFQ, on page 4 - 32
Supplier, on page 4 - 33
Notes, on page 4 - 33
Edit Apt Parameters, on page 4 - 33

Basic tool information is stored in Tool Setup and additional information can be set in the
Advanced Tool Settings screens. Tool Geometry, Feed and Speed information, SFQ, and
other tool information are set in the Advanced Tool Settings screen.

Advanced Tool Settings are optional; it is not necessary to adjust

these settings in order to run part programs. They are available to
simplify programming and increase program efficiency.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-27

Tool Geometry
Tool dimensions are set in the Geometry tab. Fields denoted with a * are required in
order to draw a tool in Solid Graphics; however, these fields are automatically populated
with information from Tool Setup, as ratio of entered diameter. A picture of the tool is
displayed, and when a field is selected, that area on the picture is denoted.

Tool length field

is selected and
corresponding
area is denoted
on picture

Figure 4–10. Tool Geometry

Most fields on the Geometry screen correspond to tool type, see the table on the
following page for information about these fields. Additional Geometry fields are:

• DIRECTION—spindle direction
• COLOR—the color of the path left by the tool in Solid Graphics. The default
selection is Sequential, where tools are represented in the following order by
color:
• Yellow—1st tool
• Orange—2nd tool
• Violet—3rd tool
• Green—4th tool
• Gray—5th tool
• Blue—6th tool
• Cyan—7th tool
• Magenta—8th tool
• Tan—9th tool
• Lime—10th tool

Alternatively, a specific color can be assigned to a specific tool by changing

the selection in the field.

4 - 28 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

The following table provides the tool-type specific fields:

Thread Diameter

Threads per inch

Shank Diameter

Chamfer Angle

Neck Diameter
Ream Chamfer
Cutting Edges
Length of Cut

Stylus length

Tip Diameter
Tool Length

Tip Length
Drill Angle

Drill Angle

Tip Angle
Diameter

Radius
Flutes

Angle
Drill X X X X X X

Tap (cutting) X X X X

Boring head X X X X X

End Mill X x x x

Face Mill x x x X X X

Ball End Mill X X X X X

Back Spotface X X X X X

Probe X X X X

Gun Drill X X X X X X

Center Drill X X X X X X X X

Chamfer Mill X X X X X X

Bull Nose Mill X X X X X X

Ream X X X X X X

Spot Drill X X X X X

Forming Tap X X X X X

Counter Bore X X X X X X X

Counter Sink X X X X X X

Keyseat Mill X X X X X X

Thread Mill
Single Cutter X X X X
(SC)

Thread Mill
Multi Cutter X X X X X X
(MC)

Taper Radius
X X X X X X X
End Mill

Corner Round
X X X X X X X
Mill

Dove Tail Mill X X X X X X X

Engraving Mill X X X X X

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-29

 Tip diameter is used to calculate Milling Type offset for Chamfer Mill,
Corner Round Mill, and Taper Radius End Mill.

When Shank Diameter, Length of Cut, and Tool Length are set as a
ratio of the diameter, values will be automatically recalculated if the
diameter changes or until a user-defined value is entered.

When used in a Thread Milling cycle, the Length of Cut and Pitch are
used to calculate the number of passes in the cycle.

Feed and Speed

Feed and Speed in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the
Tool and Material Library option.

Feed and Speed settings are carried over from Tool Setup or can be specified in the Feed
and Speed tab for specific tool and material combinations in a part program. Choose one
of the materials from the work material list for a specific tool and enter the feeds and
speeds for both roughing and finishing for that tool and work material combination. This
information is saved in the Tool and Material Library and can be utilized in future part
programs without re-entering the speeds and feeds: When the Program Parameters for a
part program specify a work material, the tool number will recall the feed and speed for
that material.

Regardless of the material set in the Feed and Speed tab, the main
Tool Setup screen will always display feeds and speeds for
“Unspecified” material.

Specify work
material

Specify
Roughing & Speed and Feed
Finishing are calculated or
can be specified
in these fields

Figure 4–11. Advanced Tool Settings: Feed and Speed

Roughing and finishing tool parameters can be specified. Fields are:

• SURFACE SPEED—set in Tool Setup, or calculated from speed and diameter

• CHIPLOAD—set in Tool Setup, or calculated based on feeds and flutes
• MAX DEPTH—set maximum depth of cut (optional)

4 - 30 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 • COOLANT—select coolant type: none, primary, secondary, or both
• SPEED—calculated value or may be user-defined
• FEED—calculated value or may be user-defined
• PECK DEPTH—set peck depth
• PLUNGE FEED—set plunge feed, or calculated based on Feed Per Rev for
hole-making tools.
Feed Per Rev is used for hole-making tools instead of chipload,
independent of the number of flutes.

Feed and Speed Calculations

The WinMax software automatically performs tool feed and speed calculations for each
tool programmed in Tool Setup, on page 4 - 21. The calculations are carried over to each
data block in the part program using the programmed tool.

The software uses data to perform the calculations from these Tool Setup fields:
Diameter, Speed (RPM), Surface Speed (FPM) or (MPM), Flutes, and Feed/Flute (Tooth).
Feeds and speeds are related using the following formulas: Speed Formulas, on page 4 -
31 and Feed Formulas, on page 4 - 32.

Calculated values are carried forward to the Mill Feed field and Speed (RPM) field for
milling and holes data blocks. You can override automatically calculated values in a data
block by inserting a user defined value. If you manually change a calculated value in Tool
Setup, you will be prompted to update feeds and speeds for the part program data
blocks.

For fields that display truncated decimal point values, you may view
the non-truncated value by pressing and holding the CTRL key and
pressing the period (.) key.

Speed Formulas

The WinMax software uses these formulas to automatically calculate the spindle speeds:

Metric Mode:

Surface Speed x 100

English Units:

If the calculated RPM exceeds the maximum spindle RPM entered in

Machine Specifications, the value appears in red font color.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-31

 If you enter the Surface Speed (fpm) value, the Speed (RPM) value
will be calculated for you.

If you enter the Speed (RPM) value, the Surface Speed (fpm) value
will be calculated for you.

In some cases, calculation rounding may slightly alter a calculated

value.

For example, if you enter a value of 7000 RPM for the Speed field in
Tool Setup for a Drill operation, the calculated value for Surface
Speed is 458 fpm.

However, if you enter a Surface Speed of 458 fpm in the Surface

Speed field, the calculated value for Speed is 6997 RPM.

Feed Formulas

For Milling data blocks, specify the number of flutes for the tool in the Flutes field.

The software uses the following formula to calculate the Mill Feed:

For Holes operations, flutes are not specified for the tool.

The software uses this formula to calculate the Mill Feed:

If the calculated feedrate exceeds the maximum contouring feedrate

for the machine, an error is generated during the program run.

NC SFQ
NC SFQ in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the NC/
Conversational Merge option.

Surface finish quality in NC programming is set in the NC SFQ tab of Advanced Tool
Settings. Change Enable Tool SFQ to “YES” and adjust the Tool SFQ. This automatically
sets the SFQ value whenever the tool is used in NC programming and will override the
SFQ value set in Program Parameters or with the G05.3 setting.

4 - 32 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Supplier
Supplier in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the Tool and
Material Library option.

The Supplier tab is optionally used to store information about tool supplier and orders in
memo-type fields.

Notes
Notes in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the Tool and
Material Library option.

The Notes tab is used to store notes and miscellaneous information about a tool in a
memo-type field.

Edit Apt Parameters

The Edit Apt Parameters fields are defined as follows:

• Tool—displays the tool number and type entered on the Tool Setup screen.
This field cannot be edited. To change tools, go to Tool Setup, on page 4 - 21.
• NC Gear Range—define the spindle gear range. 0 = Low; 9 = High.
• NC Tool Number—indicate the starting tool in the tool changer. The range is
0 to 999.
• NC Diameter Offset—indicate the tool diameter to be used for cutter
compensation. This field is used for posting only. This will not affect a file that
is saved as an ISNC file.
If Cutter Comp is selected from the Output Tool Path As field on the
Post Processor Configuration screen, the value in the NC Diameter
Offset field will be put into the APT file. This value will refer to the
tool diameter offset on the target machine. If Centerline is selected
from the Output Tool Path As field, then the value entered in the NC
Diameter Offset field will not affect the APT file.

• NC Length Offset—indicate the length offset at the machine tool.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-33

Change Tool Number
The Change Tool Number softkey allows you to change the number of an existing tool or
copy an existing tool and give it a different number while retaining the tool with the same
number.

To change the Tool Number or create a copy of a tool, display the tool in the Tool Setup
screen. With the cursor in the Tool Number field, select the More softkey to display the
next softkey menu. Select the Change Tool Number softkey. The Current Tool
Description and New Tool Number fields are displayed. Type the new number into the
New Tool Number field and select one of the following softkeys:

• Change Tool Number—changes the number of the tool to the new Tool
Number. The old tool number is simply changed to the new number. If the
new tool number is already assigned to another tool, then the tool numbers
are swapped. If the Tool Library option is enabled, the tool number is also
updated in the spindle or ATC.
• Copy Tool—adds a new tool that is identical to the Current Tool Description.

If the New Tool Number is not in the current program or Tool & Material
Library, the current tool is copied to the New Tool Number. If the New Tool
Number is already used in the current program or Tool & Material Library, a
prompt appears that the New Tool Number selected will be replaced with a
copy of the current tool.

Part Program Tool Review

Use the PART PROGRAM TOOL REVIEW softkey on the Program Review screen to review
the tools used in a specific part program. This screen lists all tools used in a program, and
the program block where they are used. The location column indicates if the tool is in
Manual, Auto, or Spindle.

List of tools
used in program

Supplier, Order,
Notes, Tool Life
tabs can be used to
keep track of
other tool
Program blocks information
in which
highlighted
tool is used
(highlight block
and select the
EDIT BLOCK F1
softkey to jump to
the program block)

Figure 4–12. Part Program Tool Review of a Conversational program

4 - 34 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 Jump to a program block by highlighting the block and selecting the
EDIT BLOCK F1 softkey.

Tool information can be entered into the Supplier, Order, and Notes tabs at the bottom of
the Part Program Review screen.

Tool notes can be entered and viewed on the Notes tab in the Part
Program Tool Review screen and the Advanced Tool Settings screen.
Notes can also be viewed in the Select Tool screen (accessed with
the Select Tool from List softkey when entering a tool in a program
block).

The Supplier, Order, and Notes tabs are only available with the Tool &
Material Library option.

Part Program Tool Review for NC Programs

Part Program Tool Review in NC programming scans the current NC program for T codes
to determine the tools used in the program. T codes are ignored if they are inside a
comment (surrounded by parentheses) or if they are an argument in a macro call
(preceded by a G65).

Tools are listed by number. When a tool is selected (highlighted), the Block list will display
the number and NC text of all blocks that contain the T code for a tool change to the
selected tool, as shown below:

List of tools
used in program

Program blocks
in which
highlighted
tool is used
(highlight block
and select the
EDIT BLOCK F1
softkey to jump to
the program block)

Figure 4–13. Part Program Tool Review of an NC program

Jump to a program block by highlighting the block and selecting the

EDIT BLOCK F1 softkey.

If a tool in the current NC program is not defined in Tool Setup, it appears in the Tool
Review list as an unknown tool with a diameter of 0 and an unknown location. This is

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-35

shown below.

Figure 4–14. Tool Review showing Unknown tool in NC program

An undefined tool can be added to the NC tool setup by selecting the tool in the list,
selecting the Tool Setup softkey, and selecting a type or entering data for the new tool.
The tool can also be quickly added as an unknown tool with a diameter of 0 by selecting
the Add As Manual Tool softkey.

Part Program Tool Review Softkeys

Softkeys on the Part Program Tool Review screen are:

• Import Functions F1—access the Part Setup screen to establish part zero,
centerline, offset Z, safety work region, and other parameters. See Import /
Export Functions, on page 4 - 53 for more information.
• Tool Setup F2—access Tool Setup. See Tool Setup, on page 4 - 21 for more
information.
• Part Programming F3—access and create data blocks of a part program.
The current program's data blocks appear on screen when this softkey is
used. Delete, add, edit, and navigate through the data blocks. The NC editor
is displayed for NC programs. See Conversational Part Programming for more
information.
• Program Parameters F4—accesses the Program Parameters screen to
specify data common to all program data blocks. See Program Parameters,
on page 4 - 42 for more information.
• Tool Change Review Screen F5—access the Tool Change Review screen to

4 - 36 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 see all tool changes in the part program. Available with the Tool Change
Optimization option. See Tool Change Optimization in the Options manual for
more information.
• Match Tools F6—access tool matching results. See Tool Matching, on page 4
- 37 for more information.
• Add As Manual Tool F7—adds the highlighted unmatched tool as a Manual
tool in the Tool & Material Library and assigns it the next available tool
number.

Tool Matching
When a new program is loaded and the Tool & Material Library option is enabled:

1. The new program’s tools are compared to the tools in the Tool & Material
Library to identify a match by tool type and diameter.
The diameter is set in the Tool Matching: Maximum Diameter
Difference field in Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3 - 8.

2. If only one tool match is found, the program will use that tool number,
including the Zero Calibration, from the Tool & Material Library. Note that Feed
and Speed data will not be replaced in the program.
3. If more than one match exists, WinMax then looks at tool number. If it finds
the same tool number, type, and diameter, it will match the tool.
4. If there are no matches, tools are either loaded into the Tool & Material Library
as Manual, or users can select from a list of tools in the Tool & Material Library
that are similar to the unmatched tool. The AUTOMATICALLY LOAD
UNMATCHED TOOLS AS MANUAL field in Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3
- 8 controls this:
• When the field is set to Yes, any unmatched tools from the new part
program will be added to the Tool & Material Library and will be assigned
to the first available tool number.

For example, a new program is loaded with tool #12 as a 0.375 inch end
mill. If tool #12 in the Tool & Material Library is not a 0.375 inch end mill
and no other tool in the Tool & Material Library is a 0.375 inch end mill,
then this tool will be added to the Tool & Material Library as a Manual tool
and will be assigned the first available tool number.

• When the field is set to NO, a prompt to match tools appears. Answer YES
to the prompt to review the unmatched tools.

Tools that are unmatched are displayed in Tool Matching Results.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-37

Tool Matching Results
When tools from the part program cannot find a matching tool in the Tool & Material
Library, these unmatched tools are listed in the Tool Matching Results screen, accessed
with the MATCH TOOLS softkey from the Tool Review screen. Unmatched tools from the
current part program are listed in the upper “Tools to be matched” section; as each
unmatched tool is highlighted, a list of tools from the Tool & Material Library with the
same tool type are listed in the lower, “Closest matches” section. Tools of the same type
are listed in order of closest to furthest diameter difference from the highlighted tool.

Unmatched tools

Difference in
tool diameter List of similar tools
from in Tool Library (list
unmatched corresponds to the
tool highlighted tool)

Figure 4–15. Tool Matching Results

The CHOOSE AS REPLACEMENT F4 softkey appears when you select a tool from the
Closest matches list. Use this softkey to replace an unmatched tool with the selected tool
from the Tool & Material Library.

If there is not a match in “Closest matches,” use the EXIT softkey to return to the Part
Program Tool Review screen, and use the ADD AS MANUAL TOOL F4 softkey to add the
tool to the Tool & Material Library. Use the TOOL SETUP F1 softkey to see the tool details.

The SAVE TO DATABASE F6 softkey appears when you select an unmatched tool from the
list. Select the softkey to save the tool to the Tool and Material Database.

Saving a tool to the Tool and Material Database will not match a tool
with an existing tool in the Tool & Material Library. The program will
still consider the tool unmatched and will not run until a match is
selected or a new tool is added to the Tool & Material Library.

4 - 38 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Tool Management
Tool Management screens are accessed in Manual Mode with the TOOL MANAGEMENT F1
softkey. Tool information can be stored independent of the part program data using the
Tool & Material Library option. Program-specific tool information (such as feed rate and
speed) created for one program can be reused when tools are selected from the library
for a subsequent program. Tool Management tabs are:

• Spindle—shows the tool located in the machine’s spindle.

• Auto—lists the tools that are in the machine’s tool magazine.
• Manual—lists the tools that may be utilized on the machine but are not
currently in the machine’s magazine or spindle. The Manual tab is active only
with the Tool & Material Library option.

Spindle
The Spindle tab displays information about the tool in spindle and allows you to set the
next tool to execute a tool change, or to change the current tool in spindle.

Fields are:

• NEXT TOOL—lists the next tool to call into the spindle

• TOOL IN SPINDLE—lists the current tool in the spindle

Auto
The Auto tab lists the tools in the ATC (automatic tool changer) magazine. Tools are listed
by pocket number. The view can be customized to show only occupied pockets or to
disable even-numbered pockets (for large tools), using the checkboxes at the top of the
screen.

Softkeys on the Tool Library Auto tab are:

• MOVE TOOL TO SPINDLE F1—when spindle is empty, highlighting a tool on

the Auto or Manual lists will enable this softkey. Select to confirm and the tool
will appear on the SPINDLE tab. The control will prompt to insert the tool into
the spindle.
• SELECT TOOL F2—highlight a tool in the list and touch this softkey to select
the tool
• CLEAR POCKET F3—removes the selected tool from the pocket
• CLEAR ALL POCKETS F4—removes all tools from the Auto list

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-39

Manual
The Manual tab shows tools available for use that are resident on the control, but are not
currently in the spindle or ATC. The Manual tab is active only with the Tool & Material
Library option:

Softkeys are:

• MOVE TOOL TO SPINDLE F1—when spindle is empty, highlighting a tool on

the Auto or Manual lists will enable this softkey. Select to confirm and the tool
will appear on the SPINDLE tab. The control will prompt to insert the tool into
the spindle.
• INSERT TOOL F3—moves a tool from Manual to Auto.
• Tool Setup F4—accesses the Tool Setup screen.
• CHANGE TOOL NUMBER F5—allows you to change the number of a tool in
the list. See Change Tool Number, on page 4 - 34 for more information.
• CLEAR TOOLS F6—clears (removes) tools from the list:

• CLEAR SELECTED TOOL F1—removes highlighted tool from the Tool

Library.
• CLEAR AUTO AND MANUAL TOOLS F2—removes all tools from the Tool
Library.
• CLEAR AUTO TOOLS F3—removes all tools in Auto from the Tool Library.
• CLEAR MANUAL TOOLS F4—removes all tools in Manual from the Tool
Library.

4 - 40 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Tool and Material Database
The Tool and Material Database is available when the Tool & Material Library option is
enabled. It is accessed in Auxiliary Mode. Tool and material information can be entered
and stored in the database. The materials entered into the database are available in the
work material list located on the Feed and Speed tab in Tool Type Setup/Advanced Tool
Settings. This information is saved in the material database and can be utilized in future
part programs without re-entering the speeds and feeds.

To add a tool to the database:

1. Select the TOOLS tab.

2. Select ADD TOOL F1 softkey.
3. Enter the tool information in the fields. See Advanced Tool Settings, on page 4
- 27 for more information about these fields.

Softkeys on the TOOLS tab are:

• Add Tool—accesses Tool Type Setup screen to add a tool to the database.
• Edit Tool—accesses Tool Setup to edit tool.
• Delete Tool—deletes the selected tool from the database.

To add a material to the database:

1. Select the MATERIALS tab.

2. Select the ADD MATERIAL F1 softkey.
3. Type the name of the material in the NAME field.
4. Add any notes in the NOTES field.
5. Select the SAVE F1 softkey.

Softkeys on the MATERIALS tab are:

• Add Material—add a new material to the database.

• Edit Material—change the specifications of a material in the database.
• Delete Material—delete a material from the database.
• Select Material for Part Program—uses the highlighted material in the
current part program.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-41

Program Parameters
Program parameters are displayed on tabs for General 1, General 2, Milling 1, Milling 2,
Holes, Probing, and Performance. The Performance tab in WinMax is active when the
SelectSurface Finish Quality option is enabled. The programmer has the option to make
changes to any or all of the program parameters and save them as user defaults. The
user defaults and original WinMax defaults can be restored by using the appropriate
softkey. Parameters can be altered with the Change Parameters data block during
program execution. Refer to Conversational Part Programming for details.

Refer to these sections in Program Parameters:

General Parameters 1, on page 4 - 43

General Parameters 2, on page 4 - 44
Milling Parameters 1, on page 4 - 45
Milling Parameters 2, on page 4 - 48
Holes Parameters, on page 4 - 50
Probing Parameters, on page 4 - 51
Performance Parameters, on page 4 - 52

Refer to NC Part Programming for information about NC Parameters.

Softkeys on the Program Parameters screen are:

• Save As User Defaults—saves the selected field’s value as the user-defined

default value
• Restore User Defaults—restores the user-defined values to a field that has
been populated with other values
• Restore Winmax Defaults—restores the WinMax-defined values to a field
that has been populated with other values.
Change Parameters program blocks load the user-defined
parameters set in Program Parameters.

• NC Parameters—accesses NC Configuration Parameters. These parameters

are available only with NC Part Programming.

4 - 42 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

General Parameters 1
These are the fields on the General 1 tab:

• Retract Clearance—Determines the Z coordinate to which the Z axis

positions before rapid table positioning. This includes a tool moving from one
drilled hole to another, or from one milling operation to another (programmed
in separate data blocks or generated as a patterns operation).
• The default is the maximum programmable Z travel. This is the difference
between the Z-Axis MAX Travel and the Z-Axis MIN Travel as indicated on
the Machine Specifications screen.
• The range is 0 through 99.9999 inches (0 through 2514.6 mm).

If the next operation has a different Z Start value, the CNC always
retracts to the highest dimension. When a Position block is programmed,
the tool always retracts to the safety plane programmed as Z Top of the
Safety Work Region.

• Enable Pecking Retract Clearance—Enables the use of a different retract

clearance for pecking operations. When set to On, the tool retracts to the
height specified in the Pecking Retract Clearance parameter (below). When
set to Off, the tool retracts to the Retract Clearance height. Default is Off.
• Pecking Retract Clearance—Specifies the height above Z Start to which
the tool should move between operations. Field is active when Enable Pecking
Retract Clearance parameter is set to On.
• Rapid Traverse—Determines the feedrate that the table (X and Y axes)
moves between one point in the part program to the next point in the
program (rapid table positioning).
• The default is 400 ipm (10160.0 mm/min).
• The Range MAX value is user-defined in the Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate
field on the Machine Specifications screen. The Range MIN value is 0.1
ipm (2.54 mm/min).
• Peck Clearance Plane—Determines the relative distance to the previous
peck level. In conversational programming, the tool retracts to Z Start after
each peck. The tool then rapids down to a position which is the Peck
Clearance distance above the previous peck level before plunging to the next
peck level at plunge feedrate.
• The default is 0.05 inches (1.27 mm).
• The range is 0 through 99.9999 inches (0 through 2514.6 mm).
• Chord Error—Determines the maximum distance the cutter deviates from
the true arc path.
• Override Lockout—Disables the Axis Feed dial on the jog unit of Hurco
controls when set to On. The default is Off.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-43

General Parameters 2
These are the fields on the General 2 tab:

• Depletion Retract—Specifies the dimension above the part surface to which

the Z axis retracts. The Z axis retracts while waiting for additional data to be
transmitted into the current program during execution of an NC part
program.
• The default is 0.005 inches (.127 mm).
• The range is 0 through 99.9999 inches (0 through 2514.6 mm).

Depletion Retract only applies to NC programs.

• Interrupt Cycle Z Retract—Retracts the Z axis to Retract Clearance when

you press the Interrupt Cycle console button on a Hurco control.
• Select No to keep the spindle in its current position when the button is
pressed.
• The default is Yes.

• First Peck Offset—Permits modifying the depth of the first peck in milling
and hole operations. Use this feature whenever a first peck needs to be
deeper or shallower than subsequent pecks. The permitted range is –
10.0000 to + 10.0000 inches or –254.00 to +254.000 millimeters. The First
Peck Offset value is added to the operation’s peck depth in calculating the
first peck only. Use a positive First Peck Offset value for deeper peck and
negative value for shallower peck. A First Peck Offset of 0.000 will run the
pecks normally, without any First Peck Offset.

For example, if the peck depth in a drill operation is set to 0.2000 inches and
First Peck Offset is set to +0.0500 inches, then the first peck will be 0.2500
inches down from Z start plane and all subsequent pecks will be 0.2000
inches deep. If the First Peck Offset is set to –0.0500 inches, the result is a
first peck only 0.1500 inches down from Z start plane and every subsequent
peck will be 0.2000 inches deep.

• Move to Safe Pos During TC—Indicates whether or not the table will move
to the right/front of the machine when the operator is changing a tool. If this
field is set to Yes when a part program block calls for a tool change, the table
will move out of the way.
• Include Offset Z in Tool Zero Cal—Indicates whether or not the Offset Z
value in Part Setup is added to the zero calibration value when tool lengths
are adjusted. Default is Yes.
• Yes—Zero Calibration is adjusted by the Offset Z value.
• No—Zero Calibration is the distance from machine home to the tool tip
when positioned at the workpiece or gauge block.
• Tool Change Optimization—Indicates if Tool Change Optimization should
be enabled for the program. Default is Yes. (This field is available in Program
Parameters only; it is not available in Change Parameters.)
• No—Any Tool Change Optimization blocks are ignored by the program.
• Yes—Tool Change Optimization blocks are used by the program.

4 - 44 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 See Tool Change Optimization in the Options manual.

Milling Parameters 1
Milling parameters apply to cutter motions during conversational milling operations only.
Milling 1 Parameters fields are defined as follows:

• Blend Offset—Determines the distance from the entry point of the part
surface and the Z plunge point where the tool enters the work piece. This
field is used in milling circles, frames, and ellipses; it is also used in contours
with Milling Type set to Left/Right or Profile Left/Profile Right and Enable
Blend Moves set to Yes.
• The default is 0.1181 inches (3 mm).
• The range is 0 through 1.0 inch (0 through 25.4 mm).
• Blend Overlap—Determines the distance the tool travels past the entry
point before it is withdrawn from the part. This field is used in milling circles,
frames, and ellipses; it is also used in contours with Milling Type set to Left/
Right or Profile Left/Profile Right and Enable Blend Moves set to Yes.
• The default is 0.1181 inches (3 mm).
• The range is 0 through 1.0 inch (0 through 25.4 mm).

1 Start Point

2 1/2 X Length

3 X Length

4 Blend Offset

5 Tool Path

6 Blend Offset

7 Blend Overlap

8 End Point

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-45

 Figure 4–16. Blend Offset and Blend Overlap

• Finish Feed (%)—Allows you to specify a different feed for finishing

operations without changing the tool. The specified percentage is a multiplier
of the feed entered in Tool Setup. This multiplier is applied whenever the tool
is entered for the finishing operation of a milling block. (See example below.)
If this parameter is changed in either Program Parameters or with a
Change Parameters block, all existing data blocks that are affected
by the multiplier will be updated.

• Finish Speed (%)—Allows you to specify a different speed for finishing

operations without changing the tool. The specified percentage is a multiplier
of the speed entered in Tool Setup. This multiplier is applied whenever the
tool is entered for the finishing operation of a milling block. (See example
below.)
If this parameter is changed in either Program Parameters or with a
Change Parameters block, all existing data blocks that are affected
by the multiplier will be updated.

Finish Feed / Finish Speed example:

Program Parameters: Finish Speed %=120, Finish Feed %=80

Tool Setup: Speed=5000, Feed=100

When a program block is created, the speed is automatically set to 5000

and the feed is set to 100. When the tool is entered into the finishing
operation, the multipliers are applied, and finish speed is set to 6000
(5000 x 120%), finish feed is set to 80 (100 x 80%).

The Finish Feed and Finish Speed parameters are not applied if the
roughing feed or speed in a data block is changed.

Values entered manually into the Finish Feed or Finish Speed fields in
the data block take precedence over these parameters.

If the Tool & Material Library option is enabled, separate roughing

and finishing defaults can be set for each tool. If finishing defaults
are defined for a tool, those values take precedence over the Finish
Feed and Finish Speed multiplier parameters.

• Stock Allowance Mode—Specifies whether the Finish XY and Finish Z

parameters used are those set in Program Parameters (Program Parameters
mode) or those set in the individual data blocks (Data Block mode).

In Data Block mode, the Allowance tab is active in the data block,
and the values entered there supercede the Finish XY and Finish Z
values contained in Program Parameters. In Data Block mode, the
value must be entered in the data block; it is not applied
automatically.

• Finish XY—Determines the amount of material in the X-Y axis direction to be

removed by the finish pass.
• The default is 0.2 mm (0.007874 inches).

4 - 46 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 • The range is 0 through 25.4 mm (0 through 1.0 inches).

Stock is removed up to a maximum of 90% of tool diameter.

For example, if 25 mm is entered in the Finish XY field, and the tool

has a diameter of 10 mm, the XY stock removed on the finish pass
will be 9 mm (90% of the 10 mm tool diameter), despite the number
entered in the Finish XY field.

• Finish Z—Determines the amount of material in the Z axis dimension to be

removed by the finish pass.
• The default is 0.1 mm (0.003937inches).
• The range is 0 through 1.0 inch (0 through 25.4 mm).

If Finish Z is zero on a pocketing finish pass, the tool only runs

around the inside pocket wall.

• Milling Direction—Determines the milling type. Select Conventional or

Climb milling for canned milling cycles (e.g., frame, circle, and ellipse) and for
contours (e.g., line, arc).
• The default is Climb.
• The choices are Conventional or Climb.

• Default Pocket Overlap—Determines the cutter step-over movement in a

pocket milling operation. After the first pass, the tool follows a path produced
by offsetting the boundary by the tool radius, plus the pocket overlap for each
pass while avoiding islands inside the boundary.
• The default is 50%.
• The range is 0 through 99%.

• Cutter Comp Param—Determines the programmed tool automatically

follows the finished contour of the part with cutter compensation. Without
cutter compensation, the center line of the programmed tool follows the print
line.
• Insert Arc—Inserts a tangent arc to connect two line segments, or a line
segment and an arc segment (when the two cutter compensated
segments are offset and do not intersect).

1 Programmed Tool Path

2 Cutter Compensated Path
3 Using the Insert Arc Parameter

Figure 4–17. Cutter Compensation using the Insert Arc parameter

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-47

 • Insert Line—Joins the cutter compensated lines and arcs as described
below:
• Two line segments are extended until they intersect (provided they
form a 90º or greater angle). If the lines form an angle of less than
90º, a line is inserted to connect them.
• Line and arc segments have the line segment extended, and a tangent
line to the arc segment inserted and extended until the lines intersect
(provided they form a 90º or greater angle). If the segments form an
angle of less than 90º, a line is inserted to connect them.
• Two arc segments have tangent lines (to the arcs) inserted and
extended until the lines intersect (provided the extended tangent lines
form a 90º or greater angle). If the extended tangent lines form an
angle of less than 90º, a line or arc is inserted to connect them.

1 Programmed Tool Path

2 Cutter Compensated Path
3 Completed Path Using the Insert Line Parameter

Figure 4–18. Cutter Compensation using the Insert Line parameter

Milling Parameters 2
The Milling 2 Parameters fields are available only when the Helical Plunge option is
installed. The parameters are:

• Mill Plunge Type—specifies the plunging strategy to use for the milling
pass. Choose Straight or Helix. The default setting is Straight.
• Mill Plunge Ramp Slope—defines the slope of the helical ramp for the
milling tool. The range is 1° to 90°. Choosing 90° will result in a Straight
Plunge. The default value is 10°.
• Mill Plunge Helix Radius—used for specifying the Helical Plunge radius as a
percentage of the tool diameter. The range is from 0% to 100%. Choosing
0% results in a Straight Plunge. If a value of 50% or less is chosen, it will
prevent a post (a thin cylinder of material formed after helical plunging) from
being formed by the Helical Plunge. The default setting is 25%.
• Finish Plunge Type—specifies the plunging strategy to use for the finish
phase. Choose Straight or Helix. The default setting is Straight.
• Finish Plunge Ramp Slope—defines the slope of the Helical Ramp for the
finishing tool. Range is 1° to 90°. Choosing 90° will result in a Straight

4 - 48 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 Plunge. The default setting is 25°.
• Finish Plunge Helix Radius—defines the value of the Helical Plunge radius
as a percentage of the diameter of the finishing tool. The range is 0% to
100%. If a value of 50% or less is chosen, it will prevent a post from being
formed by the Helical Plunge. The default setting is 25%.
• Operator Specify Pocket Start—if Yes, the pocket start location fields will
appear on pocket boundary screens, when Pocket Type Inward is selected.
The default setting is No. The value of Pocket Plunge Near Center is ignored.
• Pocket Plunge Near Center—if Yes, UltiPocket will attempt to perform a
plunge at the approximate center of the pocket and then move to the start
point of the pocket. If the software detects an interference with plunging in
the center, the plunge will be made at the start of the tool path. The default
setting is No.
The Pocket Plunge Near Center parameter may be used with frames,
circles, ellipses, and contours with Pocket Type Inward, and
contours with Pocket Type Outward.

Frames, circles, and ellipses with Pocket Type Outward

automatically attempt to plunge to the center.

• Allow Plunge Outside Pocket—if Yes, UltiPocket will plunge outside the
pocket, moving through the open side of the pocket boundary. May be used
with open contours only; cannot be applied to frames, circles, or ellipses
because they cannot be programmed with open contours.

Open Contour

Plunge point

Toolpath

The Operator Specify Pocket Start parameter must also be set to Yes.

The contour Pocket Type must be set to Inward.

The plunge point should be placed near the open side of the contour
outside the pocket. The tool moves through this opening near the
approximate center. The software verifies the tool will fit through the
opening and generates an error message if it will not.

Refer to Helical Plunge in WinMax Mill Options for details about this option.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-49

Holes Parameters
The Holes Parameters fields are defined below:

• Bore Orient Retract—specifies the distance the boring tool moves away
from the part surface at the end of the boring cycle. Used only when a Bore
Orient data block is included in the part program.
• The default is 0.05 mm (0.019685 inches).
• The range is 0 through 99.9999 inches (0 through 2514.6 mm).
• Drill Dwell—specifies the pause (dwell) in seconds before the tool retracts at
the bottom of a drill operation. The most often changed Holes Parameter is
Drill Dwell. This parameter controls the length of time the drill stays at the
bottom of a hole after it has drilled the hole. This parameter is not used for
NC programs.
• The default is 0.0 (When set to 0.0 seconds, the drill immediately retracts
out of the hole after it is drilled.)
• The range is 0 through 20 seconds.
• Bore Dwell—specifies the pause in seconds before the tool retracts at the
bottom of a Bore operation. This parameter is not used for NC programs.
• The default is 1.0 seconds.
• The range is 0 through 20 seconds.
• Tap Retract (%) (UltiMotion only)—specifies the retract speed for a tap
operation, as a percentage of the plunge speed.
• The default is 100% (retract speed = plunge speed).
• The range is 50-1000%.

4 - 50 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Probing Parameters
The Probing Parameters are:

• Automatic Tool Monitoring—indicate if tools that were calibrated with the

probe should be automatically checked with each tool change.
• Zero Cal (Length) Tolerance—indicate the zero calibration (tool length)
used when checking for a defective tool with automatic monitoring.
• Diameter Tolerance—indicate the diameter tolerance used when checking
for a defective tool with automatic monitoring.

See also Automatic Tool Monitoring in Options.

• Retain Probed Part Setup—allows the probed part setup and/or tool
calibrations to be retained for new program runs. Choices are:
• Do Not Retain—no updates will be made to part zero or tool lengths.
• Retain All—retains part setup and tool calibrations.

Previous versions of WinMax may have included additional selections

which have subsequently been removed; older programs that
contained a selection other than Do Not Retain or Retain All will be
converted to Retain All upon opening, and a message will appear
informing the user.

For example, the following table shows Part Setup values for a sample
program before and after a Probed Part Setup is executed:

Original Part Setup values Probed Part Setup values

Part Zero X = 20.0000 Part Zero X = 19.1234

Part Zero Y = 10.0000 Part Zero Y = 11.1111

Probe Z = 15.0000 Probe Z = 16.5555

Skew Angle = 0.0000 Skew Angle = 2.0045

Zero Cal = 18.0000 Zero Cal = 17.4444

(Tool Setup) (Tool Setup)

If Retain Probed Part Setup is set to Do Not Retain, the original values
for Part Setup and Zero Cal will be restored. Part Setup and Tool Setup will
contain the original data (20, 10, 15, 0, and 18).

If Retain Probed Part Setup is set to Retain All, Part Setup and Tool
Setup will contain the probed values (19.1234, 11.1111, 16.5555,
2.0045, and 17.4444).

OFFSET Z is not affected in any way by the probe block or the

parameter setting.

• Start Coordinate Reference—indicates if the start coordinates for a Probe

Part Setup are relative to the machine zero or to the active part zero.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-51

Performance Parameters
Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) is enabled with the SelectSurface Finish Quality option. SFQ
parameters can be modified in either Conversational or NC programming. The default
SFQ for roughing is 80 and finishing is 20. Recommended values are:

SFQ Desired Result

1-20 High precision parts /finishing

21-79 Good surface quality / finishing, semi-finishing

80-100 High throughput / roughing

Table 4–1. Recommended SFQ values

If SelectSurface Finish Quality is not enabled, conversational

roughing tools use SFQ of 80 and conversational finishing tools use
SFQ of 20; NC default is 50.

Smoothing Tolerance specifies the maximum allowable deviation from the tool path. The
range is 0.0000 to 0.0500 inches (0.0000 to 1.2700 mm); default is 0.0005 inches
(0.01270 mm). This corresponds to NC code G05.2.

4 - 52 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Import / Export Functions
Import Functions imports Part Setup, Tool Setup, Program Parameters, Part Program
information, and/or NC states from an existing Conversational program or NC State file
into the active part program. Tool lists can also be imported or exported from this menu
(with the Tool & Material Library option installed).

1. Select the Import / Export Functions softkey from the Input screen.
2. Select the appropriate softkey to import from a Conversational file, or to
import or export NC state or Tool Library.
3. Choose the origination or destination file, or select an operation for the Tool
Library then select the appropriate file.
4. Select the Import or Export softkey.
5. Choose one or more components from the list and select the Begin Operation
softkey.

Conversational Components
These are the Conversational components that can be imported from an existing part
program into a new part program:

• Part Setup—imports the Part Setup from the selected program into the
current part program.
• Tool Setup—imports tools from the Tool Setup of the selected part program
to the current tool setup on the machine. If the Tool & Material Library option
is enabled, unique tools are added as Manual and other tools may be
matched (see Tool Matching, on page 4 - 37).
• Program Parameters—imports the Program Parameters from the selected
program into the current part program.
• Part Program—imports the part program from the selected program into the
current part program.

NC States
NC components are stored in the NC State file on the control. Only one NC State file
exists on a control, and it is updated as changes are made to current or new NC
programs.

When transferring an NC program from one machine to another the NC State file from the
can be imported or exported using the Import (or Export) NC State From (To) File
softkey. These are the components that can be imported into an NC file:

• Program Parameters—imports the Program Parameters.

• Part Setup / Work Offsets—imports the Part Setup and Work Offsets.
• Tool Setup—imports tools from the Tool Setup of the selected part program
to the current tool setup on the machine. If the Tool & Material Library option
is enabled, unique tools are added as Manual and other tools may be
matched (see Tool Matching, on page 4 - 37).

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-53

 • Tool Offsets—imports Tool Offsets.
• NC Parameters—imports the NC parameters.
• NC Variables—imports NC variables.
The imported components will replace the current components from
the open program; they are not merged together.

NC States are saved as follows:

1. Select the Import / Export Functions softkey from the Input screen.
2. Select the Save NC State To File softkey.
3. Choose the location to which the file will be saved in the Save State File
screen.
4. Type the name of the file in the FILE NAME field, or use the default,
ncstate.ncsx, which appears automatically in this field.
It is recommended to rename the NC States file to match the active
part program. When renaming, you must retain the .ncs extension at
the end of the file name. For example, Program Name.ncsx.

5. Select the SAVE F1 softkey to save the NC States file. A message that the file
saved successfully will briefly appear on screen.

Importing NC States into Conversational Programs

NC States information that is valid for Conversational programs (the Part Setup, Tool
Setup, and Program Parameters) can be imported into a Conversational program.

1. Make sure the current part program is Conversational.

2. Select the IMPORT FUNCTIONS softkey from the Input screen.
3. Select the IMPORT NC STATE FROM FILE softkey.
4. Choose the NC States file from which components will be imported and select
the LOAD F1 softkey. Either file may be used to import any component.
5. Choose one or more components from the list and select the BEGIN
OPERATION softkey.
6. Select OK to continue the import operation.

4 - 54 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Import and Export Tool Library
Import and Export Tool Library functions are available only with the
Tool and Material Library option.

The Import / Export Tool Library softkey allows you to move tool information from the
WinMax control to other locations and vice versa.

Import / Export Tool Library submenu softkeys are:

• Export Auto And Manual Tools—save Auto and Manual tools to a different
directory.
• Export Manual Tool List—save only the Manual tools to a different
directory.
• Import Into Manual Tool List—load tools into the control from a directory.
All tools are imported into the Manual list, even if they were exported as Auto
tools.

The ATC positions are not retained when tools are imported.

• Export Tool and Material Database—save tool templates and materials to

a different directory.
• Append Tool and Material Database—load tool templates and materials
into the control from a directory. These are added to the existing database on
the control.
• Replace Tool and Material Database—load tool templates and materials
into the control from a directory. The existing database is replaced.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-55

Copy and Change Blocks
To make changes to several data blocks at one time, use the Copy and Change Blocks
softkey to access the Block Editor.

These are the softkeys:

• Copy Blocks—Duplicate the specified data blocks in another location in the

part program.
• Move Blocks—Remove the specified data blocks from their current location
and transfer them to another location in the part program.
• Delete Blocks—Remove the specified data blocks from the part program.
• Modify Dimensions—Add offsets to the axes' coordinate dimensions currently
stored in the part program for a range of blocks.
• Change All Feeds, Speeds, and Tools—Substitutes new feeds and speeds
for all tools within the specified range of data blocks.
• Change Feeds and Speeds by Tool—Substitutes new speeds and feedrates
for a specified tool within a range of data blocks.

The following fields appear when you select either softkey, except where
noted otherwise:

• Start Block—Enter the number of the first block in the program to be

changed.
• End Block—Enter the number of the last block in the program to be
changed.
• Put Block Before—Move a block in the program before the indicated
block.
• Change Tool Number—Identify the tool number. Blocks using this tool
number will be changed. (This field appears only for the Change Feeds
and Speeds by Tools screen.) See Change Tool Number, on page 4 - 34
for more information.
• New Speed (RPM)—Enter a new Speed (RPM).
• New Feed—Enter a new Feed.
• New Plunge Feed—Enter a new Plunge Feed.
• New Tool—Enter a new Tool.
• New Finish Tool—Enter a new Speed (RPM).

Enter the changes in the fields and select the Make the Change softkey.

The Copy Blocks, Move Blocks, and Delete Blocks softkeys are
also available for editing a current program.

4 - 56 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Copy, Move, or Delete Blocks
The COPY BLOCKS screen is used to duplicate the specified data blocks in another
location in the part program.

The MOVE BLOCKS screen is used to remove the specified data blocks from their current
location and transfer them to another location in the part program.

The DELETE BLOCKS screen is used to remove specified data blocks from the part
program.

Fields on the screens are:

• Start Block—Enter the number of the first block in the program to be

changed.
• End Block—Enter the number of the last block in the program to be changed.
• Put Block Before—Move a block in the program before the indicated block.

Modify Dimensions
Modify Dimensions allows you to add offsets to the axes' coordinate dimensions currently
stored in the part program for a range of blocks.

These softkey choices appear when you select the Modify Dimensions softkey:

• Start Block - enter the number of the first block in the program to be
modified.
• End Block - enter the number of the last block in the program to be
modified.
• X Offset - enter the offset for the X axis.
• Y Offset - enter the offset for the Y axis.
• Z Offset - enter the offset for the Z axis.
• Change Z-Start - enter the new Z-Start position.
• A Offset - enter the offset for the A axis.
• B Offset - enter the offset for the B axis.

Enter the modifications in the fields and select the MAKE THE CHANGE softkey to
modify the programmed dimensions.

Modified dimensions are applied to Pattern blocks that provide their

own reference points: Loop Rotate center points, Loop Angular
reference and center points, Mirror Image reference point, and Scale
reference point.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-57

Changing Feeds, Speeds, and Tools
Feeds, Speeds, and Tools can be changed for a range of blocks in a part program with the
following softkeys from the Block Editor screen:

• Change All Feeds Speeds & Tools—change Feed, Speed, and Tool for
specified program blocks. Fields are:
• Start Block—Enter the number of the first block in the program to be
changed.
• End Block—Enter the number of the last block in the program to be
changed.
• New Speed (RPM)—Enter a new Speed (RPM).
• New Feed—Enter a new Feed.
• New Plunge Feed—Enter a new Plunge Feed.
• New Tool—Enter a new Tool.
• New Finish Tool—Enter a new Speed (RPM).

• Change Feeds & Speeds By Tool—Make changes to feeds and speeds for
blocks using a specified tool. Fields are:
• Start Block—Enter the number of the first block in the program to be
changed.
• End Block—Enter the number of the last block in the program to be
changed.
• Change Tool—Enter tool; changes will be made only to blocks using this
tool.
• New Speed (RPM)—Enter a new Speed (RPM).
• New Feed—Enter a new Feed.
• New Plunge Feed—Enter a new Plunge Feed.
• New Tool—Enter a new Tool.

Change Surface Finish Quality

The surface finish quality can be changed for a range of blocks in a part program. Fields
are:

• Start Block—Enter the number of the first block in the program to be

changed.
• End Block—Enter the number of the last block in the program to be
changed.
• Change Rough SFQ—Specify Yes or No.
• Rough SFQ—Enter the Rough SFQ for the range of blocks.
• Change Finish SFQ—Specify Yes or No.
• Finish SFQ—Enter the Finish SFQ for the range of blocks.

4 - 58 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Review Mode
The Program Review screen is accessed with the console Review key.

Sub-blocks within the

selected data block

List of program’s
data blocks
Select to jump
to selected
data block or
sub-block

Tools and Notes for

the selected block

Figure 4–19. Program Review Screen

Data blocks and sub blocks of the active part program are displayed. Program blocks can
be moved and added in the Program Review screen.

Tool data and notes are displayed in the Tools and Notes tabs:

• Tool information for the selected data block is displayed in the Tools tab.
When a tool is selected the Edit Tool softkey is displayed and will open Tool
Setup for the selected tool.
• Notes can be entered for the selected data block or sub block in the Notes
tab. Notes are displayed on the Review screen and with the data block when
the blocks are printed.

Program Review softkeys are:

• Multiple Block Functions F1—allows multiple blocks to be cut, copied, or

pasted between programs:
• Cut F1—highlight data block(s) and touch this softkey to delete from the
current program. Block(s) can then be pasted into the same or a different
program.
• Copy F2—highlight data block(s) and select this softkey to make a copy
that can be pasted into the same or a different program.
• Paste F3—places previously cut or copied data block(s) above the
highlighted data block.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-59

 • Delete F4—highlight data block(s) and touch this softkey to permanently
remove the block from the program.
Multiple blocks can be selected simultaneously by holding the F and
Alt keys while pressing the up or down arrow keys.

• Convert to Rotary F6—converts linear dimensions to rotary dimensions;

a flat geometry can be wrapped around a cylinder, given a radius. Blocks
that can be wrapped are: contour, circle, frame, slot, polygon, TrueType
lettering holes (locations), and patterns (loop linear, loop rectangular, and
mirror).
• Convert to Linear F7—converts rotary dimensions to linear dimensions.
For WinMax Desktop and WinMax Mill on machines not equipped with
rotary, the Default Conversational Program Type must be
changed to a rotary type in order to convert the program to rotary.
This is changed in Conversational Settings in Utilities.

• Delete Block / Delete Sub Block F2—deletes the highlighted data block or
sub-block.
• Part Programming F3—allows you to edit the selected data block or sub-
block. See Part Programming in the Conversational Programming manual for
more information.
• Program Parameters F4—access General, Milling, Holes, Probing, and
Performance parameters. NC parameters are accessible for NC programs.
• Import / Export Functions F5—access the Part Setup screen to establish part
zero, centerline, offset Z, safety work region, and other parameters.
• Part Program Tool Review F6—review the tools used in the part program.
• Insert Block / Sub Block Before F7—inserts a new program block or sub-
block before the selected block or sub-block.

4 - 60 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Manual Safety Override Mode
For machines with CE safety circuit switches enabled, the Manual Safety Override mode
allows the enclosure doors to be opened when the system is in Manual mode so the
operator or supervisor can perform limited manual machine operations.

While the doors are open, manual jog feed is restricted. The jog feed is limited to 2
meters per minute, or approximately 80 inches per minute, with manual safety override
enabled. No jogging is permitted with manual safety override disabled.

Manual operations that cannot be started with the doors open,

regardless of manual safety override mode, are:

• Spindle On
• Park Machine
• Warm Up Machine
• Calibrate Machine
• Spindle Orient
• Chip Removal
• Tool Changer Functions

When the Manual Safety Override mode is enabled, it remains enabled until control power
is turned off, the Emergency Stop button is pressed, or machine power is turned off. A
fault will disable the Manual Safety Override mode also.

If you try to jog the axes with the doors open without enabling the manual safety
override mode, a prompt appears to cycle the keyswitch or enter the access code to
enable jog.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-61

CE Diagnostics
To enable the Safety Override mode, access the CE Status & Diagnostics screen.

1. From the Manual mode screen, select the Diagnostics softkey.

2. Select the CE Diagnostics softkey. The following screen appears:

Figure 4–20. CE Status & Diagnostics Screen

The fields on the CE Status & Diagnostics screen are defined as follows:

• CE Configuration—Displays CE logic configuration. Enabled or disabled in

Integrator Support Services.
• Door Lock Status—Displays status of all doors with CE safety circuit
switches Unlocked or Locked. The Door Switch Status must be Closed when
the Door Lock Status is Locked.
• Door Switch Status—Displays status as Closed or Open. The switch must
be Closed when the Door Lock Status is Locked.
• Limited Manual Operations—Displays status as Disabled or Enabled.
Status is Enabled after entering an access code. Enabled allows limited safe
motion with the doors open.
• EIR Relay State—Displays status as Disabled or Enabled. When enabled,
the enclosure doors have been locked due to a process request or an active
process.

4 - 62 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Entering the Access Code
A numeric access code is required to enable Limited Manual Operations. Follow these
steps to enter the access code:

1. Select the Enter Access Code softkey. A message appears with a prompt for
entering a 4 digit code.
2. Enter a numeric code using the console keypad. Asterisks (*) appear
representing each entered digit. When the fourth digit is entered, the asterisks
and message disappear.
Using a non-numeric key cancels the operation.

When the code is successfully entered, the Limited Manual Operations feature is enabled,
as indicated in the status field.

For initial setup of the Access Code, the user is prompted to enter a new code and then to
enter the same code a second time before it is accepted.

Changing an Existing Access Code

To change an existing access code, follow these steps:

1. Select the Change Access Code softkey. A message appears asking you to
enter the current code.
2. Enter the current numeric code from the console keypad. A message appears
asking you to enter the new code.
3. Enter the new code. A message appears asking you to re-enter the new code
for confirmation.
• If the new code is not re-entered, the code is not changed.
• When the new code is verified, the code will change and a message
appears to confirm the action.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-63

Graphics
WinMax graphics include Toolpath and Solid Graphics, on page 4 - 66. Real-time graphic
animation is available with the Runtime tool, which shows a simulated tool cutting the
part on screen while the machine is cutting the actual part.

Solid graphics and Runtime tool are only available with the
Advanced Verification Graphics option.

Graphics Settings
Graphics preferences are set in the Graphics Settings screen, which is accessed with the
GRAPHICS SETTINGS F8 softkey. The Graphics Settings screen shows the following:

Display Properties
Fields on the Display tab are:

• Show Graphics—set the type, either Show All, Toolpath, or Solids.

• Tool Path—specify Yes or No to show the tool path (appears as red dashed
line).
• Part Surface—specify Yes or No to show the part surface (appears as solid
cyan line).
• Rapids—specify Yes or No to show rapid moves (appears as yellow solid
lines).
• Stock Outline—specify Yes or No to show the stock outline, which is set in
the stock geometry screen (appears as green solid line). Refer to the “Stock
Geometry” section in Part Setup for more information.
• Plunges—specify Yes or No to show plunge moves (appears as purple lines).
• Stock Transparency—shows the stock in a solid (Opaque) or clear
(Translucent) view.
• Enable Runtime Tool Display—specify Yes or No to see simulated tool
move around the part while the machine is running; tool also shown when
jogging tool near part.
• Background Color—choose Black or White background color.
• Default View—set the default view when WinMax is started, either XY plane,
XZ plane, Isometric, or All Views.
• Default Zone (dual-zone machines)—set the zone initially displayed in
graphics when the application is started.

Performance Properties
Fields on the Performance tab are:

• Show Roughing Tool Path for 2D Surfaces—specify Yes or No to show all

the roughing tool path, applies only to Toolpath graphics.
• Show Roughing Tool Path for 3D Surfaces—specify Yes or No to show all
the roughing tool path for 3D Molds and Swept Surfaces, applies only to

4 - 64 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 Toolpath graphics.
• Use Chord Error From Program—specify Yes or No to use the chord error
value programmed in general parameters when rendering curves in NC.
• Graphics Chord Error—enter the chord error to be used when drawing
curves in graphics.
• Graphics Optimization—optimizes graphics processing and rendering.
Default is Full.
• Refresh Speed—choose the refresh speed for graphics rendering. Choose
one of seven options between fastest speed (Fastest Completion) to
smoothest rendering (Smoothest).

Axis Configuration
Select the program type and axis settings in this tab to optimize graphics viewing.

Fields are:

• Override Machine Configuration—specify Yes to override the machine

configuration with different rotary axis settings for graphics.
• Rotary Axis ISO Standard—specifies if the positive direction of the rotary
axis matches the ISO standard. Available when Override Machine
Configuration is set to Yes.
• Tilt Axis Preference—specifies the tilt axis preference: neutral, positive, or
negative. Available when Override Machine Configuration is set to Yes.
• Universal Type—specifies the type of machine when using Universal Rotary
configuration.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-65

Toolpath and Solid Graphics

Toolpath graphics displays a wireframe view of the part. Toolpath is also animated to
show the tool in motion if the runtime tool is displayed (only available with the Advanced
Verification Graphics option).

Solid graphics displays a solid 3-dimensional part; only available with the Advanced
Verification Graphics option.

Denotes the
view selected

Indicates
the stage of
processing

Figure 4–21. Solid graphic display

The console Draw button initiates drawing. The Draw Options menu is displayed (for both
Toolpath and Solid) to control drawing and animation:

• DRAW OPTIONS F1—displays the following draw options:

• DRAW (PAUSE) F1—starts drawing the part. When drawing is in
progress, the softkey displays PAUSE—select it to pause the drawing.
When paused, the softkey displays DRAW—select it to resume drawing.
• ACCELERATED DRAW F2—displays only the completed drawing without
showing each block as it is drawn. There may be a delay before the
completed drawing appears on screen; selecting the SHOW PROGRESS F2
softkey displays the drawing at the current point each time the softkey is
selected.
• SINGLE STEP F3—displays only one step or program block at a time.
Subsequent selection of SINGLE STEP will execute the next step or block.
• NEXT TOOL CHANGE F4—displays cutting from one tool change to the
next.
• SELECT VIEW F2—choose XY plane, XZ plane, YZ plane, Isometric, or All
Views. For dual-zone machines, the Select Zone softkey displays Zone 1,
Zone 2, or All Zones.

4 - 66 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 • ZOOM F3—magnifies an area of the graphic. Select the softkey and choose
one of the following:
• Zoom In—magnify incrementally by 20% each time the softkey is
selected.
• Zoom Out—shrink view incrementally by 10% each time the softkey is
selected.
• Default Zoom—returns to the zoom level to the default value.
• Fit To View—returns drawing to the default position, rotation, and zoom
levels.
• “Touch-and-drag”—place stylus at a point on the screen and drag it to
expand the box over the area you wish to magnify. When stylus is lifted
from screen the area will be magnified.

• PAN F4—moves the graphic up, down, left, or right. Use the softkeys (Pan
Up, Pan Down, Pan Left, Pan Right, or Center), or touch the screen and drag
the graphic. Fit to View returns the drawing to the default position, rotation,
and zoom levels.
• ROTATE F5—changes the rotation of the graphic. Softkeys include Rotate
Up, Rotate Down, Rotate Left, and Rotate Right. Default Rotation returns
rotation to the default value.
• DB SEARCH F6—jumps to a selected data block. Select the softkey, touch an
area on the graphic touchscreen, and select the JUMP TO BLOCK softkey.
• SNAPSHOT F7—creates an image of the solid drawing that is stored with the
file. The image is displayed on the Program Manager screen when the
program is highlighted.
• GRAPHICS SETTINGS F8—displays the Graphics Settings screen.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-67

4 - 68 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
MACHINE OPERATION BASICS
The following sections explain basic machine operation.

Machine Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
Recovery and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
Automatic Tool Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
HMX Automatic Pallet Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
Dual-Zone Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
Stop Machine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
Restart Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33
Shutdown Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-1
Machine Start Up
Calibrate Machine
Calibrating establishes the machine reference point (absolute zero) for each axis.
Absolute zero is the location on the table, usually a corner or near a corner, where the X
and Y axes intersect. This value does not change.

To calibrate the machine, press the Manual Mode console button. "Uncalibrated" will be in
the Cal Status field.

Establishing Servo Power

Perform the following steps to establish servo power:

1. If necessary, release all Emergency Stop buttons. Twist the button in the
direction indicated by the arrows to release it.
2. Press the Manual Mode console button.
3. Press the console Power On button to turn on the machine. The Power On
button lights up.
4. If there is a servo or spindle error, press the Reset Servos and Spindle softkey
to clear it. The Start Cycle button begins flashing.
5. Press the Start Cycle button to turn on the machine servos. The Start Cycle
button stops flashing.

Axes Calibration
To calibrate all axes, follow these steps:

1. Press the Calibrate Machine softkey. The Start Cycle button begins to flash off
and on.
2. Press the flashing Start Cycle button. The Axis Limit Switches field indicates
the current status of the machining center’s limit switches as each axis
calibrates.
3. The machine position display (at the top of the text screen) shows zero (0) for
all axes when the calibration process is complete.

Warm Up Machine
If the machine has been idle for an hour or more, it is recommended that the warm up
cycle be run. Warming up an idle machine before part cutting improves component
reliability and machine performance. You must be in Manual mode to run a warm up
cycle.

Follow these steps to warm up the machining center:

1. The control power must be on and the axes must be calibrated. There must
not be any tool in the spindle, and the Tool in Spindle field on the Manual
screen must be 0.

5 - 2 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 2. Select the Warm Up Machine softkey. The Start Cycle button begins flashing.
3. Press the Start Cycle button (to cancel the warm up cycle, press any Mode
console button or softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button). The axes
slowly move from one end of the machine to the other. The spindle moves at a
low RPM for five minutes.
4. The warm up cycle completes in 15 minutes. The Manual screen reappears and
axis movement stops.

Follow these steps to cancel the warm-up cycle:

1. Press the Feed Hold console button.

2. Press the Spindle Off button.
3. Press the Feed Hold button a second time, or press the Stop Cycle button.

Reset Master
To restart the control (reboot the system) without switching the power to the machine
tool off and back on again, follow these steps:

1. Press the Auxiliary console button. The Auxiliary screen appears.

2. Press the More softkey.
3. Press the Reset Master softkey. The Yes and No softkeys appear. When the Yes
softkey is pressed, the system will reboot. Pressing the No softkey aborts the
reset process.
Be sure to save any part program you’re working on before resetting
the master. In NC Programming, an unsaved part program will be
permanently erased. In Conversational Programming, the part
program will be saved, but any changes made after the last autosave
will be lost.

Recovery and Restart

Restart a part program at almost any point within the program - typically, the point at
which the running program was interrupted.

If the Emergency Stop button was used to stop machining, machine power must be
restored before restarting the program.

To restart the program, follow these steps:

1. Select the console Auto button. The Start Block default is 1, and the End Block
default is the last block of the program.
2. Enter the proper Start Block and, optionally, an End Block if other than the end
of the program.
3. Touch the Recovery Restart softkey.
4. If the Start Block contains multiple choices for restart, then prompts are
displayed to select the proper point of restart.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-3
Manual Mode
Manual mode controls machine settings and operations. The top part of the screen
displays the DRO. See Digital Read Out (DRO), on page 4 - 11 for more information.

These are the softkeys for Manual mode:

• Tool Management F1—Access tool information for Spindle, Auto Tools, and
Manual Tools.
• Manual Function Setup F2— Set manual spindle speed and jog feed, retract
tool, execute a manual rapid move, turn chip removal on and off, turn
washdown coolant on and off, and turn worklight on and off from this screen.
• Diagnostics F3— Access the CE Status & Diagnostics screen and the ATC &
Machine Diagnostics screen. See Manual Safety Override Mode, on page 4 -
61 and ATC and Machine Diagnostics, on page 5 - 11 for more information.
• Park Machine F4—Center the table and leave the spindle at the home
position.
• Warm Up Machine F5—Warm up an idle machine.
• Orient Spindle F6—Ensures that the Z axis is at the correct height for a tool
to be inserted in the spindle.
The ORIENT SPINDLE softkey will not function unless the enclosure
doors are completely closed.

• Reset Servos and Spindle F7—Activates only to enable recovery from

certain types of electronic hardware faults such as overloads.
• Calibrate Machine F8—Establish absolute zero for each axis on the machining
center.

Manual Function Setup

The Digital Read Out is displayed at the top of the Manual Function screen. See Digital
Read Out (DRO), on page 4 - 11. Other fields on this screen are:

• Manual Jog Feed—enter the jog feedrate.

• Manual Spindle Speed—enter the spindle speed.
• Rotary Jog Feed (rotary machines)—enter the rotary feedrate.

Softkeys are:

• Retract Tool—retracts the tool.

• Manual Rapid Move—accesses the manual rapid move parameters.
• Chip Removal Forward On/Off—turns the chip conveyor on in a forward
direction. Also turns conveyor off.
The Chip Conveyor continues to run when you exit the Manual
screen. If you want to stop the conveyor, you must use this softkey
before you exit the screen (E-stop will also stop the conveyor).

5 - 4 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 • Chip Removal Reverse On/Off—turns the chip conveyor on in a reverse
direction. Also turns conveyor off.
The Chip Conveyor continues to run when you exit the Manual
screen. If you want to stop the conveyor, you must use this softkey
before you exit the screen (E-stop will also stop the conveyor).

• Washdown Coolant On/Off—turns the washdown coolant on and off.

• Worklight On/Off—turns the worklight on and off.

Manual Rapid Move

Manual Rapid Move executes a single axis rapid move to a specific position at a controlled
feedrate. The operator can enter an axis position, either in machine or part coordinates,
and initiate the move to that position at a specified feedrate.

The DRO is displayed at the top of the screen; see Digital Read Out (DRO), on page 4 -
11. The Manual Rapid Move fields are:

• Coordinate System—specifies the coordinate system for the end position of

the move, either Part or Machine.
• Manual Rapid Feed—specifies the feedrate of a linear axis move.
• Rotary Rapid Feed—specifies the feedrate of a rotary axis move.
• X / Y / Z—specifies the end position of the move in a linear axis.
• A / B / C—specifies the end position of the move in a rotary axis, if equipped
(fields are inactive for a non-rotary machine).

More than one axis end position may be entered, but the move
occurs only on the axis that is selected with the corresponding Rapid
Move softkey.

Softkeys are:

• Rapid Move X—enables the rapid move in X.

• Rapid Move Y—enables the rapid move in Y.
• Rapid Move Z—enables the rapid move in Z.
• Rapid Move A—enables the rapid move in A (softkey is inactive if the
machine is not equipped with a rotary/tilt A axis).
• Rapid Move B—enables the rapid move in B (softkey is inactive if the
machine is not equipped with a rotary/tilt B axis).
• Rapid Move C—enables the rapid move in C (softkey is inactive if the
machine is not equipped with a rotary C axis).

To perform a Manual Rapid Move:

1. In Manual mode, select the Manual Function Setup softkey.

2. Select the Manual Rapid Move softkey. The Manual Rapid Move fields are
displayed. (This softkey is grayed out if the machine is not calibrated.)
3. Select Part or Machine coordinate system from the drop-down Coordinate
System list.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-5
 4. Set the linear axis feedrate in the Manual Rapid Feed field. Alternatively, set
the rotary axis feedrate in the Rotary Rapid Feed field.
5. Specify the end position of the move in the appropriate axis field(s).
6. Select the appropriate Rapid Move softkey to enable the move. When the
softkey is selected, a message is displayed that instructs the operator to press
the Start Cycle button to move the axis. When the Start Cycle button is
pressed, the rapid move is performed.
Only one axis move can be performed at a time. During the move, all
other Rapid Move softkeys are disabled until the move is completed.
Once complete, another softkey can be selected, initiating the next
move.

The Rapid Override knob/potentiometer is active during the move.

5 - 6 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Automatic Tool Changer
The ATC for HMX and VTXU machines is a random-pocket tool changer that tracks tools in
the magazine using an ATC Map. All ATC operations require that the servo power is on,
that the machine is calibrated, and that the ATC is at Home position.

Each VMX or VM machining center is equipped with a swing-arm random pocket

Automatic Tool Changer (ATC).

VM Tool Magazine
The station magazine is positioned vertically on the machine. An electronic motor and
helical gear drive the magazine. When activated, the tool magazine operates as described
below:

1. The requested tool pocket rotates 90° to make the tool available for the swing
arm.
2. The swing arm rotates 60° to simultaneously grab the tool in the pocket and
the tool in the spindle.
3. The spindle unclamps.
4. The swing arm moves down to pull the tools out of the pocket and the spindle,
and then rotates 180°.
5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools.
6. Finally, the swing arm and tool pocket return to their original positions.

Types of Automatic Tool Changers (ATC)

There are two types of ATCs, which are described in the following sections:

• 40-Taper ATC with 24- or 40-Station Tool Magazine

• 50-Taper ATC with 30- or 32-Station Tool Magazine

40-Taper ATC with 24- or 40-Station Tool Magazine

This tool changer features a magazine with either 24 or 40 tool pockets (stations). The
magazine is positioned vertically on the machine. An electric motor and helical gear drive
the 24- and 40-station magazine. The 24-station magazine is round and the 40-station
magazine is elliptical. Refer to the previous table for the number of tool pockets (stations)
available for a specific machining center.

ATC Sequence
This is the basic sequence of operation of the tool magazine, assuming the magazine is
positioned to the next tool required:

1. The requested tool pocket rotates down 90° to make the tool available for the
swing arm.
2. The swing arm rotates 60° to simultaneously grab both the tool in the pocket
and the tool in the spindle.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-7
 3. The spindle unclamps.
4. The swing arm moves down to pull the tools out of the pocket and spindle, and
then the arm rotates 180°.
5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools.
6. The spindle clamps the new tool in the spindle and the swing arm rotates back
to 0°.
7. The tool pocket moves back to its original position.

Figure 5–1. VMX 40-Taper ATC with 24-station Tool Magazine

5 - 8 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

50-Taper ATC with 30 or 32-Station Tool Magazine
The VMX50/50T uses the 50-Taper ATC with a 30-station tool magazine. The VMX64 uses
the 50-Taper ATC with a 32-station tool magazine.

An electric motor, two dogs (cam detents), and three proximity switches control the 50-
Taper tool changer motion. For the VMX64, a free-standing hydraulic unit runs the
rotation of the magazine, magazine locking cylinder, and the tool pot up and down
cylinder. The ATC sequence for the 50-taper ATC is the same as the 40-taper ATC
sequence.

Figure 5–2. VMX 64/50-Taper, 32 Station ATC

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-9
HMX and VTXU Tool Magazine
The ATC can be operated in Auto or Manual machine mode, using ATC Diagnostics.

HMX Machines
For HMX machines, the following steps explain the basic sequence of operation of the tool
magazine, assuming the magazine is positioned to the next tool required.

1. The tool holder rotates to 90°, then the ATC door opens.
2. The exchange arm rotates to 90° and simultaneously grabs the tool in the tool
holder, and if present, the tool in the spindle, if the following conditions are
met:
• The X, Y, and Z axes are at tool change position.
• The spindle is oriented.
3. The spindle unclamps.
4. The exchange arm moves out and simultaneously pulls the tools from the
holder and the spindle, then rotates 180°.
5. The exchange arm moves in and swaps the tools.
6. The exchange arm rotates to 90°.
7. The ATC door closes and the tool holder simultaneously returns to its original
position.

VTXU Machines
The following steps describe the basic sequence of operation of the tool magazine in the
VTXU magazine, assuming the magazine is positioned to the next tool required.

1. The ATC door opens if the following conditions are met:

• The X and Y axes are at tool change position.
• The Z axis is at Height (refer to ATC and Machine Diagnostics, on page 5 -
11 for more information).
• The spindle is oriented.
2. The tool pocket rotates from the Up position to the Down position.
3. The swing arm rotates 90° and simultaneously grabs the tool in the tool
pocket and, if present, the tool in the spindle.
4. The spindle unclamps.
5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools, then rotates 180°.
6. The swing arm and tool pocket return to the original positions.
7. The ATC door closes.

5 - 10 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

ATC and Machine Diagnostics
The HMX machines have separate screens for Machine Diagnostics and ATC Diagnostics.
The VM, VMX, and VTXU machines have a single combined ATC & Machine Diagnostics
screen.

HMX Machine Diagnostics

Follow these steps to display the Machine Diagnostic screen for the HMX machine:

1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.

2. Select the DIAGNOSTIC softkey.
3. Select the MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS softkey.

Figure 5–3. Machine Diagnostics Screen for HMX Machine

These are the status fields on the Machine Diagnostics screen for an HMX machine:

• Spindle Status—indicates if the Spindle is Oriented or Not Oriented, and

clamped or unclamped. Oriented is required for ATC to begin.
• Tool in Spindle—indicates the tool number in the Spindle.
• ATC Status—indicates if ATC is in Home position. Home is required for ATC to
begin. Home is defined as ATC Door closed, Exchange Arm at 0°, Tool Holder
at 0°, and Magazine In Pos (1).
• Air Pressure—indicates Pressure OK or Low Pressure. Pressure OK is
required to begin an ATC operation.
• Way Lube Level—indicates Level OK or Low Level. A Low Level alarm will
not allow programs to start running.
• Coolant Status—indicates Level OK and Filter OK. Both are required for tool
coolant operation. Available with the Coolant Through Spindle (CTS) option.
• Hydraulic Status—indicates No Alarm or Alarm. An alarm will not allow
programs to start running.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-11
 • Spindle Chiller—indicates No Alarm or Alarm. No Alarm is required to begin
an ATC operation.
• Overload Status—indicates Tripped or Not Tripped. Not Tripped is required
to operate the machine.

HMX ATC Diagnostics

Display the ATC Diagnostics screen for the HMX machine by following these steps:

1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.

2. Select the DIAGNOSTIC softkey.
3. Select the ATC DIAGNOSTICS softkey.

Figure 5–4. HMX ATC Diagnostics Screen, Status Condition Fields

HMX ATC Status Conditions

These are the status condition fields that appear on the ATC DIAGNOSTICS screen. Green
indicators next to fields identify when the status is in the home position.

• Spindle Status—indicates if the Spindle is Oriented or Not Oriented, and

clamped or unclamped. Oriented is required for ATC to begin.
• Tool in Spindle—indicates the tool number in the Spindle.
• ATC Axis Positions—indicates At X, At Y, and At Z positions. All three are
required for ATC to begin.
• Z-Axis Position—indicates At Zero position.
• Magazine Position—indicates the current magazine position (note that this
may not be the tool number).
• ATC Status—indicates if ATC is in Home position. Home is required for ATC
to begin. Home is defined as ATC Door closed, Exchange Arm at 0°, Tool
Holder at 0°, and Magazine In Pos (1).

• Tool Holder—indicates 0° or 90° position. 0° is required for ATC Status

5 - 12 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 Home.
• Exchange Arm—indicates 0° or 90° position. 0° is required for ATC Status
Home.
• ATC Door—indicates Closed or Open position. Closed is required for ATC
Status Home.
• Magazine Status—indicates the current magazine position (note that this
may not be the tool number).
• ATC OK to Stop—indicates if the ATC is at a position where it can stop.
• Start Pushbutton—indicates “ON” when start button is depressed, “OFF”
when it is not.
• Spindle Unclamp PB—indicates “ON” when spindle unclamp button is
depressed, “OFF” when it is not.
• Hydraulic Status—indicates No Alarm or Alarm. No Alarm is required to
begin an ATC operation.

HMX ATC Diagnostics Softkeys

When all requirements for a softkey action are met, a prompt displays and the Start Cycle
lamp flashes. Pressing the Start Cycle button executes the command. The Start Cycle
lamp stops flashing during the execution of the command and is turned off when the
command is completed.

Selecting another softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button cancels the pending
command and causes the Start Cycle lamp to cease flashing. If the requirements for a
softkey action are not met, a message displays indicating why the action cannot be
commanded.

• Orient Spindle—sets the command to orient the spindle. Oriented is

required to begin an ATC cycle.
• ATC Door Open/Close sets the command to open or close the ATC Door.
Each press of the softkey switches command between open and close. Must
be Closed for ATC to begin.
• Tool Holder 0º/90º—sets the command to move the Tool Holder to 0° or
90°. Each press of the softkey switches command between 0° and 90°.
• Exchange Arm 0º / 90º—sets the command to move the Exchange Arm to
0° or 90°. Tool Holder must be at 90°, and ATC Door Open. Once rotated to
90°, the Exchange Arm must be rotated to 180° or jogged back to 0°.
• Spindle Clamp/Unclamp—sets the command to clamp or unclamp the
spindle. Each press of the softkey switches the command between clamp and
unclamp.
• Exchange Arm 180º—sets the command to move the Exchange Arm out,
rotate 180° and in. Tool Holder must be at 90º and ATC Door Open. Must be
at 0º for ATC to begin.

• Move Axes to TC Position—sets the command to move all required axes to

the ATC position.
• Move Z-Axis to Zero—sets the command to move the Z-axis to the Zero
position.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-13
 • Magazine CW—sets the command to move the magazine clockwise one
position.
• Magazine CCW—sets the command to move the magazine counter-
clockwise one position.
• Calibrate T/C Magazine—sets the command to calibrate the magazine. The
magazine will rotate to the Reference Pos.

VM, VMX, and VTXU ATC & Machine Diagnostics

Display the ATC & Machine Diagnostics screen for these machines by following these
steps:

1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.

2. Select the DIAGNOSTIC softkey.
3. Select the ATC & MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS softkey.

Figure 5–5. ATC & Machine Diagnostics Screen, Page 1

5 - 14 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

ATC & Machine Diagnostics Input Fields
The following descriptions are for the status of inputs for the ATC for VM, VMX, and VTXU
machines.

• Spindle Status—indicates if the Spindle is Oriented or Not Oriented.

Oriented is required for ATC to begin.
• Spindle Clamp—indicates if the Spindle is clamped or unclamped.
• ATC Z Axis Position—indicates Z is at Machine Tool Change Height.
• ATC Position (VTXU only)—indicates Z At Height and X/Y At Position.
• ATC Status—indicates if ATC is in Home position. Home is required for ATC to
begin. Home is defined as ATC Door closed (VTXU), Exchange Arm at 0°, Tool
Holder at UP, and Magazine In Pos #1.
• ATC Door Status (VTXU only)—Indicates the status of the ATC door on the
VTXU machine.
• Tool Holder—indicates Up or Down position. Up is required for ATC Status
Home.
• Exchange Arm—indicates 0° or 60° position. 0° is required for ATC Status
Home.
• Cannot move from 0° to 60° unless Z-axis is at Tool Change Height, Tool
Pocket is Down, Spindle is Oriented and Clamped.
• Cannot move from 60° to 0° unless Z-axis is at Tool Change Height, Tool
Pocket is Down, and Spindle is Clamped.

• Magazine Lock—indicates Locked or Unlocked Position. Locked is required

for ATC to begin.
• Magazine Status—indicates the current magazine position (note that this
may not be the tool number).

• Magazine In Position—indicates In Pos (1) or In Pos (2).

• In Pos (1) is required for ATC Status Home.
• In Pos (2) is active when magazine is rotating and not in position.

• Magazine Reference—indicates Reference Pos when the ATC calibration

sensor is detected.
• ATC OK to Stop—indicates Off or On. On is set during Load Arm rotation and
disables the Load Arm motor and enables the brake. Off should be set when
Load Arm is at 0 degrees or 60 degrees.
• Start Pushbutton—indicates Off or On. On is displayed when the Start Cycle
button is pressed.
• Spindle Unclamp PB—indicates Off or On. On is displayed when the Spindle
Unclamp button is pressed.
• Way Lube Level—indicates OK or Low Level. A Low Level alarm will not
allow programs to start running.
• Air Pressure—indicates OK or Low Pressure. OK is required to begin an ATC
operation.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-15
VM, VMX, and VTXU ATC & Machine Diagnostics Softkeys

When all requirements for a softkey action are met, a prompt displays and the Start
Cycle lamp flashes. Pressing the Start Cycle button executes the command. The Start
Cycle lamp stops flashing during the execution of the command and is turned off when
the command is completed.

Selecting another softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button cancels the pending
command and causes the Start Cycle lamp to cease flashing. If the requirements for a
softkey action are not met, a message displays indicating why the action cannot be
commanded. The ATC & Machine Diagnostics softkeys are listed below; some softkeys
may not be present on all machines or may appear in a different order:

• Orient Spindle—sets the command to orient the spindle. Oriented is

required to begin an ATC cycle.
• Tool Holder Up / Down—sets the command to move the Tool Holder Down
or Up. Each press of the softkey switches command between Down and Up.
• Exchange Arm 0º / 60º (90º for VTXU)—sets the command to move the
Load Arm to 0° or 60° (90°). Tool Pocket must be Z-axis at Tool Change
Height, Spindle Clamped, and Oriented Down before moving to 60° (90°).
Each press of the softkey switches command between 0° and 60° (90°).
• Spindle Clamp / Unclamp—sets the command to clamp or unclamp the
spindle. Each press of the softkey switches the command between clamp and
unclamp.
• Exchange Arm Rotate—sets the command to move the Exchange Arm
down, rotate 180° and up. Tool Pocket must be Down, Load Arm must be at
60°, and spindle must be unclamped.

• Move Z-Axis to T/C Height—sets the command to move the Z-axis to the
Tool Change Height position. Z-axis must be At Height for ATC to begin.
• Move Z-Axis to Zero—sets the command to move the Z-axis to the Zero
position.
• Magazine Pin Lock / Unlock—sets the command to lock or unlock the
magazine pin. Locked is required for ATC to begin.
• Magazine CW—sets the command to move the magazine clockwise one
position.
• Magazine CCW—sets the command to move the magazine counter-
clockwise one position.
• Calibrate T/C Magazine—sets the command to calibrate the magazine.
Magazine will rotate to the Reference Pos.

• Exchange Arm Jog Reverse—sets the command to pulse jog the exchange
arm in the reverse direction. Pulse commands will stop once the Exchange
Arm is at 0 degree.
• ATC Door Open / Close (VTXU only)—sets the command to open or close
the ATC Door on the VTXU machine. Each press of the softkey switches
command between open and close. Must be Closed for ATC to begin.
• Move Axes to T/C Position—sets the command to move all required axes
to the ATC position.

5 - 16 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

HMX Automatic Pallet Changer
The Automatic Pallet Changer (APC) system is standard on HMX machining centers.
Equipped with two pallets, the APC provides the ability to set up a part on one pallet while
a part is being machined on the other pallet.

The B-axis must be squared before any operation can occur. Refer to
Squaring the Pallet, on page 5 - 17 for instructions for squaring the
APC table.

This is the basic sequence of operation of the APC:

1. The APC Pin unlocks.

2. The APC table raises and rotates 180°. Hydraulic solenoids ensure the table
rotates in the proper direction.

The APC table does not rotate through 360°, but rotates in the
opposite direction to return to its previous position.

3. The APC table lowers into position.

4. The APC Pin locks.

Only a Hurco-certified Service Engineer can make adjustments to the

APC Table.

Squaring the Pallet

The pallet is not automatically squared during machine calibration. It must be squared
before it can be used. Follow these steps to square the pallet:

1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.

2. Select the Diagnostics softkey.
3. Select the Pallet Changer Diagnostics softkey to access the APC Diagnostics

screen.

4. Select the More softkey to access the second APC Diagnostic screen.
5. Select the Move Z-axis to APC Position softkey to position the Z-axis at the
APC position. The APC table must be in the down position to move the Z-axis
to the APC position.
6. Select the Square Pallet For Rotation softkey and press the Cycle Start
button. The pallet will rotate into the proper position for the pallet exchange
cycle.
If the B-axis is away from the squared position, selecting the Square
Pallet For Rotation softkey rotates the table at the maximum RPM
back to the squared location.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-17
Operating the APC
The APC can be operated in Auto mode within a Conversational or NC part program.

Follow these steps to operate the APC in a Conversational program:

1. On any Conversational part programming data block, select the

MISCELLANEOUS softkey.
2. Select the MACHINE FUNCTION softkey to display the Machine Function
screen.
3. Select the SHOW M CODE LIST pop-up box to display the M Code List. The
following M Codes are used to operate the APC (use the scroll bar to view more
M codes, if necessary):
• M51 Cycle Pallet Changer—requires confirmation from the Operator
before an pallet change cycle is initiated (see details below).
• M56 Cycle APC w/o Notify—complete a pallet change cycle without
confirmation from the Operator.
• M57 Cycle to Pallet #1—place Pallet 1 in the machine without
confirmation from the Operator.
• M58 Cycle to Pallet #2—place Pallet 2 in the machine without
confirmation from the Operator.

Figure 5–6. Machine Function Screen with M Code List

Using M51 does not require indicating whether Pallet 1 or 2 is in the machining
setup area. Before M51 will initiate the APC cycle, the front enclosure doors must
be closed and the APC Ready pushbutton pressed.

• If the front enclosure doors are open when the M51 operation is requested,
the program will be in a Feed Hold state and a message to close the front
enclosure doors will be displayed. Close the doors and press the APC Ready
pushbutton to continue the part program.

5 - 18 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 • If the APC Ready pushbutton has not been pressed when the M51 operation
is requested, the program will be in a Feed Hold state with the following
message displayed, “Pallet setup confirmation required to cycle pallet
changer.” Press the APC Ready and Cycle Start pushbuttons on the APC
Panel to continue the program.
Pressing Feed Hold during a pallet change cycle will stop the cycle.
Releasing Feed Hold will resume the cycle. However, Feed Hold
followed by Spindle Off (or the Stop Cycle button) during a pallet
change cycle will abort the program and the pallet change cycle. The
APC must be returned to the home position using the Pallet Changer
Diagnostics before an Auto program can be run again.

Refer to the NC Programming Manual for instructions on operating the APC within an NC
program.

APC Diagnostics
Follow these steps to access the APC Diagnostics screen:

1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.

2. Select the DIAGNOSTICS softkey.
3. Select the PALLET CHANGER DIAGNOSTICS softkey. The APC Diagnostics
screen 1 opens:

APC Diagnostics Screen 1 APC Diagnostics Screen 2

Figure 5–7. APC Diagnostics Screens 1 and 2

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-19
APC Status Conditions
The APC Diagnostics screen displays the status of inputs for the APC system.

• APC Position—indicates whether APC table is in the Up or Down position.

• Pallet in Machine—indicates whether the APC table Position 1 or 2 is in the
machining area.
• APC Clamp Status—indicates if the APC table is clamped or unclamped.
• Pallet Status in Machine—indicates Pallet Squared/Not Squared. Pallet
must be squared to begin an APC cycle.
• Z-Axis Position—indicates if the Z-axis is At Zero (calibration point), APC
position, or neither. Must be At APC position to begin an APC cycle.
• B-Axis Status—indicates if the B-axis is Clamped or Unclamped.
• Pallet Reference Position—indicates whether the pallet is in the correct
orientation. Pallet must be in the correct orientation before engaging the
pallet pin. The Manual Table Release Lever must be at Reference Pos to begin
an APC cycle.
• Pallet Pin—indicates whether the APC Pin is Locked or Unlocked. The
operator uses the Manual Table Release Lever to engage/disengage the pallet
pin. The pallet pin must be engaged to allow and APC cycle.
• APC Door Status—indicates if the APC door is Open and Unlocked, Closed
and Unlocked, or Closed and Locked.
• Hydraulic Status—indicates either Alarm or No Alarm. Status must be No
Alarm to begin an APC cycle.
• ATC Status—indicates if the ATC table is Home or Not Home. Must be Home
to begin APC cycle.

APC Diagnostics Softkeys

The APC Diagnostic softkeys are functional only when Servo Power is On and the machine
is calibrated. These are the APC Diagnostic softkeys.

• Cycle Pallet Changer—sets the command to complete a full rotation of the

APC Table. This function will perform a full APC cycle. The Z-axis will move to
the APC position, the B-axis will square, the APC table will raise, the APC
table will rotate 180 degrees, and will then lower.
• Raise Pallet Changer—sets the command to lift the APC Table to the Up
position. The B-axis must be squared and the Z-axis must be at the APC
position.
• Rotate APC to Position 1—sets the command to rotate the APC table to
Position 1 inside the machining area. The B-axis must be squared and the
APC must be in the raised position, and Position 1 must not be in the
machining area.
• Rotate APC to Position 2—sets the command to rotate the APC table to
Position 2 inside the machining area. The B-axis must be squared and the
APC must be in the raised position, and Position 2 must not be in the
machining area.
• Lower Pallet Changer—sets the command to lower the APC table to the
Down position. The Z-axis must be in the APC position.

5 - 20 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 • More—opens the second APC Diagnostics screen.
• Move Z-Axis to APC Position—sets the command to move the Z-axis to the
APC position. The APC table must be in the down position to move the Z-axis
to the APC position.
• Square Pallet for Rotation—sets the command to square the pallet.
• Enable APC Jog Mode—allows the operator to jog the APC table up and
down and also jog the APC table 180 degrees. When selected, a message
displays indicating to proceed with caution:

This message is displayed until the APC Diagnostics screens are exited or
until an E-stop occurs.

APC Jog Mode

The operator should verify the position of the Z-axis before jogging the APC. From APC
screen 1, the operator can select Raise Pallet Changer, Lower Pallet Changer, Rotate APC
to Position 1, or Rotate APC to Position 2. Once a function has been selected, the green
Start Cycle button flashes and a message is displayed:

Figure 5–8. APC Diagnostic screen 1 with APC Jog Mode messages

The operator can then press and hold the green Start Cycle button to jog the APC. The
operator must hold the Start Cycle button down while jogging. Once the Start Cycle
button is released, the jogging function stops. The operator must select a softkey
function again to enable the jogging.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-21
 Once selected, the APC Jog Mode remains enabled until the operator
navigates away from the APC diagnostic screens or an E-stop occurs

When all requirements for a softkey action are met, a prompt displays and the Start
Cycle lamp flashes. Pressing the Start Cycle button executes the command. The Start
Cycle lamp stops flashing during execution of the command and is turned off when the
command is completed.

Selecting another softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button cancels the pending
command. If requirements for a softkey action are not met, a message displays
indicating why the action cannot be commanded.

Operating the APC from the Load Station

The APC Panel, shown in the figure below, is located on the front of the machine
enclosure, below the front enclosure doors. The APC Panel is used to operate the APC
table.

Alarm Lamp

Cycle Start

Cancel Cycle

APC Ready

Manual Cycle APC

Water Gun

Figure 5–9. APC Panel

APC Panel Pushbuttons

These are the APC Panel pushbuttons, from left to right:

• Emergency Stop—disables all axis servo drives and stops all moves of the
pallet changer.
• Cycle Start—initiates the APC to cycle in Auto mode. The Cycle Start
pushbutton flashes while the operation is pending, is steady when the
operation is in process, and turns off when the operation is completed.
• Cancel Cycle—cancels any pending operation (if the Cycle Start lamp is

5 - 22 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 flashing, it will turn off). Pressing the Cycle Start pushbutton after an
operation is cancelled by the Cycle Stop pushbutton results in no APC motion.
This pushbutton does not stop the APC once it has started its cycle.
• APC Ready—readies the APC for a pallet change. The APC doors must be
closed and locked. When pressed, the Cycle Start pushbutton flashes to begin
the operation. This pushbutton is used when confirmation is required.
The console’s Start Cycle pushbutton flashes when the Hydraulic Lift,
APC Table Rotate to Position 1, or APC Table Rotate to Position 2
pushbutton is illuminated and the Cycle Start pushbutton is flashing.
Pressing the console’s Stop Cycle pushbutton cancels the operation.

• Manual Cycle APC—sets the command to complete a full rotation of the APC
Table (this pushbutton corresponds to the Cycle Pallet Changer softkey on the
APC Diagnostics screen.) This pushbutton is used only in manual or
diagnostic mode.

Manual APC Table Rotation

Near the front of the APC table is a Manual Table Release Lever. This lever provides the
input for the APC Pin Lock. To manually rotate the table without using the remote APC
Panel, pull the Release Lever out. This allows the APC table to be rotated by hand for part
setup. After rotating the APC table, the arrows on the pallet must be aligned with the
arrows on the APC table’s platform before executing a pallet exchange.

The APC table must be in Down position before using the Manual
Table Release Lever to manually rotate the table.

Failure to align arrows prior to executing a pallet exchange can result

in the APC table not positioning correctly in the machining area.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-23
Dual-Zone Machining
Dual-zone machining provides the ability to set up a job in one zone while machining in
the other zone.

To use both zones on a dual-zone capable machine, the Enable Dual Zones parameter
must be set to enable dual zones. This is done in Machine Parameters:

1. Select the Auxilary console key.

2. Select the Utility Screen icon.
3. Select the User Preferences softkey.
4. Select the Machine Parameters softkey.

The Enable Dual Zones parameter is listed on Page 1 of Machine Parameters. Set this
parameter to 1 to enable dual zones (1 is the default setting). When this parameter is set
to 0, the machine can be used as a single long bed vertical machine.

The zone partition must be removed to use as a single long bed

vertical machine.

See Figure 3–2. Machine Parameters, Page 1, on page 3 - 11 in Getting Started with
WinMax Mill for more information about the Enable Dual Zones parameter.

Part Programming for Dual-Zones

Each zone has its own coordinate system, so a Change Part Setup data block is used to
modify the coordinates for each zone. This Change Part Setup block is used to switch
zones while running a program. At the beginning of the program and at each point where
a zone change is required, insert a Change Part Setup block:

1. From the Input screen select Part Programming, the Insert Block Before
softkey, the Miscellaneous softkey, and the Change Part Setup softkey. A
Change Part Setup block is added.
2. Modify Part Zero X, Y, Z (Part Zero Z is available only if using Absolute Tool
Length mode) for the zone.
3. Modify Offset Z (if using Zero Calibration mode only) for the zone.
4. Specify the zone the part setup applies to in the Zone field.
• 1 = Zone 1 (the left-side zone when facing the machine).
• 2 = Zone 2 (the right-side zone when facing the machine).
• 0 = the current zone. Zone 0 can be used when dual zones are enabled
but you do not need to run the program in a particular zone. Setting the
Zone field to 0 will run the program in the zone that the spindle currently
occupies.

Zone field is not displayed in single long bed configuration.

5 - 24 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Viewing Graphics
Graphics can be displayed in one or both zones:

1. Press the Draw console key to display the Graphics screen.

2. Select the Select View softkey. Select the All Views softkey.
3. Select the Select Zone softkey.
4. Select Zone 1, Zone 2, or All Zones.
The zone setting must match the zone of the program (or be set to
All Zones) to view the part program in Graphics.

The zone is displayed in the lower left corner of the graphics display:

Figure 5–10. Isometric view of parts in both zones

Dual-Zone Operation
Programs can be run in one zone while the other zone is accessible to the operator for set
up or other functions.

Setup Confirmation
Each zone door is equipped with a green Zone Setup Confirmation button and a red
Emergency Stop button:

Emergency Stop Button Confirmation Button

Figure 5–11. Emergency Stop and Zone Confirmation buttons

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-25
The green Zone Setup Confirmation button must be pressed to confirm that the zone is
ready before the spindle will move into the zone to start machining.

The red Emergency Stop button will stop all machine operation when pressed.

Running Programs
To run a program, press the Cycle Start button. A pop-up confirmation message appears,
and the green Zone Setup Confirmation button flashes on the door of the zone where the
program will run. Push the green flashing button to confirm setup. If the spindle head is
in the current zone for program, no confirmation is required.

While the program is running, you are able to set up in the other zone. When the door to
the second zone is closed and the program completes its run in the first zone, the green
Zone Setup Confirmation button on the second zone door flashes. Press it to start
machining in the that zone.

• In dual-zone configuration, the door of the opposite zone can be opened until
the green Zone Setup Confirmation button is pressed. The door must be
closed before the confirmation will be accepted and the door locked.
• To unlock the door while the spindle head is in the opposite zone, press the
green Zone Setup Confirmation button to cancel confirmation.
• With CE enabled the door will not open when the green Zone Setup
Confirmation button is lit.

5 - 26 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Auto Mode
Programs are run in Auto Mode. Press the Auto button on the console to access Auto
Mode to check for errors, compute estimated run time, recovery/restart, perform a dry
run, or run a part program.

Figure 5–12. Auto Mode screen

Fields are:

• Part Program Path—displays the part program’s directory path.

• Part Program Name—displays the name of the current part program.
• Start Block—specifies the first block that will be run; defaults to 1. If you
want to execute only a certain portion of the conversational part program, the
Start and End Block fields may be changed.
• End Block—specifies the last block that will be run; defaults to the last block
number in the program. If you want to execute only a certain portion of the
conversational part program, the Start and End Block fields may be changed.

The following softkeys are available in Auto Mode:

• Use Editing File—selects the active program file to run. If this softkey is not
selected, WinMax defaults to the last program run. If the last program run
does not match the program that is being edited (as indicated in status bar),
the operator will be prompted to select which program to run.
• Feed & Speed Optimization—fine tunes program execution, using the Axis
Feed Rate and Spindle Speed dials to adjust values. This softkey is disabled in
Test Mode.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-27
 • Check for Errors—checks the program from the Start Block through the End
Block and displays error status. The number of the data block containing the
error is included in the error message.

The time required for error checking depends upon the program’s length and
complexity. Select the Abort Operation softkey to stop error checking at any
time.

• Compute Estimated Run Time—provides an estimate of time it takes to

run the program. Select the Abort Operation softkey to stop computing
estimated run time.

Error checking automatically occurs during Compute Estimated Run Time.

• Recovery Restart—restarts a conversational or NC part program; typically

the point at which the program was interrupted. This softkey is disabled in
Test Mode.
• For Conversational Programs—if necessary, Conversational Start and End
blocks can be changed from the default.

For Mill Contour data blocks: Recovery Restart only occurs at segment 0
of a Mill Contour data block, not at a segment within a data block.

For Pattern data blocks: when Recovery Restart begins at the first block of
a pattern, all instances of the pattern are run. If Recovery Restart begins
at a block within the pattern, WinMax prompts the user to specify which
instance to restart at, and then requests any additional restart
information for the start block.

• For NC Programs—use the following softkeys to restart an NC program

after it was aborted either by the machine or the operator. Preparatory
functions such as coolant, feeds and speeds, and offsets will be executed
before machining resumes, and Tool Vector input is checked.

• Set Restart Marker—manually sets the restart marker. An “R” will

appear to the left of the block selected, and will clear if the program
successfully runs.
• Auto Set Restart Marker—automatically marks the last block being
executed when the program was stopped, or where an error occurred
during error checking.
• Reset Restart Marker—clears the Restart Marker and cancels the
Recovery Restart operation. Can be used on a block after a G41/G42.
• Set End Marker—indicates the block that system should use to end
program verification and execution. An “E” is inserted to the left of the
block.
• Reset End Marker—restores end marker to its default position at the
end of the program.
• Dry Run—active in Test Run mode only, performs a program test run to
identify potential problems before cutting the part. Specify all or a portion of
the part program that will be tested in the Start and End blocks.

Trace the tool over the part at the programmed minimum Z level with the
Spindle Off. Peck cycles and roughing passes are skipped.

5 - 28 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 If the Z-Start value is set below the stock surface, the minimum Z
value must be programmed so the tool does not plunge into the part.

• Run Program—initiates program execution and displays monitoring

information. This softkey is disabled in Test Mode. When the softkey is
selected, the program is buffered and the Start Cycle button flashes. Pressing
the Start Cycle button starts the program run. If the machine is not
calibrated, the Manual screen immediately displays. When the program is
complete, the message “Program is complete. Press Start Cycle to run
program again” appears. Press Cycle Start button to run again.

Changes made to a program while it is running take effect when the

Start Cycle button is pressed again.

Auto Mode Monitoring

The Auto Mode Monitoring screen appears when the RUN PROGRAM softkey is selected
and program execution begins. The upper part of the screen displays the DRO. See Digital
Read Out (DRO), on page 4 - 11 for more information. The lower area of the screen
displays the Spindle Load Monitor, the data block executed, the type of operation, and the
part count. For NC programs, five lines of NC code are shown; to view more NC code as
the program runs, select the NC MONITOR softkey. The bottom portion of the screen is
reserved for program status and error messages.

These are the fields on the Auto Mode Monitoring screen:

• Zone (dual-zone machines only)—displays the current zone.

• Machine and Part Axes—displays the current position of all axes.
• Opt Stop On (Off)—displays the status (on or off) of the Optional Stop for
NC programs.
• Chip Removal—displays the status of the chip auger.
• Tool in Spindle—displays the tool number of the tool in the spindle.
• Spindle—displays the current spindle speed.
• Feed—displays the current feed rate.
• Program Run Time—displays the time the program has been running.
• F(%)—displays the current Feedrate per Minute percentage set on the axis
Feed Rate knob.
• R(%)—displays the current Rapid Traverse Feedrate percentage set on the
Rapid override knob.
• S(%)—displays the current spindle RPM percentage set on the Spindle Speed
override knob.
• Axis Limit Switches—displays the status of the machine’s limit switches as
each axis calibrates.
• Spindle Load Monitor—displays the percentage of full load on each axis as
the program runs. The load is displayed in a bar graph format, with colors
progressing from green to yellow to red to indicate the percentage of load
from 0 to 150%.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-29
 • Block—displays the current program block.
• Part Count—displays the number of times the program was executed. This
field can be edited by selecting the Reset Part Count softkey. A pop-up
window opens, where the part count value can be changed or reset to zero.

5 lines of
Spindle Load NC code
Monitor

Figure 5–13. Auto Mode Monitoring screen

These are the monitoring softkeys that may be available for Auto Mode Monitoring:

• Reset Part Count—Part Count is the number of times a program was

executed. To return this value to zero when a new program starts, select the
Reset Part Count softkey. A pop-up window opens, where the part count
value can be changed or reset to zero.

Access to the part counter is locked out by Edit Lockout Level

“Full,” set in User Interface Settings. See Edit Lockout, on page 3 -
4 for information.

• Chip Removal Forward On/Off— turn the chip auger in the forward
(clockwise) direction on or off. This selection is saved when the Interrupt
button is pressed or after the program has finished running. If a stop
condition or mode change is made before restarting a new part program or
exiting the interrupt cycle, the saved information is cleared. This softkey is
only available if your machining center uses a chip auger.
• Optional Stop On/Off—pauses the program and shuts off the spindle.

For NC programs, when Optional Stop is On, the M01 code in the NC program
will be processed; when Optional Stop is Off, the M01 code is ignored.

• Select DRO—change the size of the digital read out (DRO) on the screen.
From the Select DRO screen you can see machine information displayed in
either Full Status or Full DRO. Full Status displays the current location of
machine and part axes, as well as other machine information. Full DRO
displays the current location of machine and part axes, Distance to Go and
other machine information (with abbreviated categories). The current zone is

5 - 30 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 also displayed (dual-zone machines only).
• Coolant Washdown On/Off—turn the coolant washdown on or off for
washing chips from the enclosure.
• NC Monitor—displays a pop-up window containing the current NC code. This
feature allows you to view the code as the program runs; the program name
appears in the Current Program Name box at the bottom of the monitor. The
line of code that is currently being machined is identified in red. When the
“Show Modals” boxed is checked, the current active modals are shown. As
machining progresses, the monitor will scroll through the lines of code. Select
the “Close” button at the bottom of the window to close the NC Monitor.
• Toggle Rapid Override Enable—enable or disable the ability to override the
programmed rapid traverse using the Rapid Override console knob.
• Worklight On/Off—turn the enclosure worklight on or off. This softkey is
only available if your machining center is equipped with an enclosure
worklight.

Stop Machine Operation

There are three methods to stop machine operation without turning off the power:

• Emergency Stop
• Park machine
• Control Power Off Timer parameter
The methods described here stop machine operation, but do not
shutdown the control. See Shutdown Control, on page 5 - 33 for
more information about shutting down the control.

If the machine will not be used for several days, or the shop has
power surges or blackouts, turn off machine power at the main
power switch, after stopping machine motion and shutting down the
control.

Emergency Stop
To shut down the machining center quickly, press the Emergency Stop button. All motion
stops and power is shut off to the spindle, relay control, way lubrication pumps, and
servo systems.

Do not use Emergency Stop shut down if the machine has a long
table with heavy equipment attached to one end. Instead, park the
machine so that the weight of the table and any attached equipment
will be evenly distributed.

Before hitting the Emergency Stop button, park the machine or

center the table.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-31
When the Emergency Stop button is pressed, a special error file is created and saved to
the machine hard drive in a folder called NavESTOP. These files record the machine
conditions at the time the Emergency Stop button is pressed. These files can be retrieved
when necessary for service purposes; refer to Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page
3 - 41 for more information.

Park Machine
Parking the machine centers the table and places the spindle at the home position. Table
and attached equipment weight is distributed evenly when the machine is parked. Before
parking the machine, the servo power must be on, the machine must be calibrated and
the Tool in Spindle must be 0.

Follow this procedure to park the machine:

1. Press the Manual Mode console button.

2. Select the PARK MACHINE softkey. The Start Cycle button flashes.
3. Press the Start Cycle button. The machine moves to its park position.
4. A message with instructions to return to the power-up condition is displayed.

Control Power Off Timer

Set the Control Power Off Timer on the Machine Parameters screen. All motion stops and
power is shut off to the spindle, relay control, way lubrication pumps, and servo systems.

Where can we go from here?

To restart the machine after the Emergency Stop was pressed, follow
this sequence:

1. Twist the Emergency Stop button to release it.

2. Press the Manual Machine Mode button.
3. Press the Power On button.
4. Press the Start Cycle button.
Or...

To restart the machine after it was parked, follow this sequence:

1. Press the Manual Machine Mode button.

2. Press the Power On button.
3. Press the Start Cycle button.
Or...

If machine will not be used for several days or power surges and
blackouts are common, switch off the machine’s power. After
restarting, calibrate and warm up the machine.

5 - 32 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Restart Control
The Restart Control command will remove control power, complete an orderly shutdown
of the WinMax Mill control, and then restart.

Follow these steps to use the Restart Control command:

1. Press the Aux/Menu key followed by the Utility Screen softkey to access the
Utilities screen and softkey menu.
2. From the Utilities screen, select the Restart Control softkey to access the
Restart Control command. A pop-up message appears: “Do you really want to
restart the control?”
3. Select Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the Restart Control command is
performed. This feature saves time and avoids having to shut down the entire
machine when it is only necessary to restart the control.

Shutdown Control
The Shutdown Control command will remove control power and complete an orderly
shutdown of the WinMax control.

Hurco recommends using the Shutdown Control command prior to

turning off machine power to ensure that no data is lost.

1. Follow these steps to use the Shutdown Control command:

2. Press the Aux/Menu key followed by the Utility Screen softkey to access the
Utilities screen and softkey menu.
3. From the Utilities screen, select the Shutdown Control softkey to access the
Shutdown Control command. A pop-up message appears: “Do you really want
to shut down the control?”
4. Select Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the Shutdown Control command is
performed.
5. Wait for the shutdown process to finish before shutting off machine power at
the Main Disconnect switch.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-33
5 - 34 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
RECORD OF CHANGES
04-0116-115 rB, Nov 2012

Revised by: H.Arle

Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, Nov 2012

Changes

• Updates to reflect software changes, including:

• new fields in Conversational Settings
• updates to Import NC States screen

04-0116-115 rA, Aug 2012

Revised by: H.Arle

Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, Aug 2012

Changes

• Updates to reflect software changes, including:

• updates to Graphics settings
• new Tool Life Monitoring feature
• Drill Dwell default value
• updates to Program Edit Lockout functionality
• Diameter in Tool Probing
• Toggle single- and dual-screen in WinMax Desktop
• Absolute Tool Length mode default

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Record of Changes — 1

04-0116-110 rL, July 2012

Revised by: H.Arle

Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, July 2012

Changes

• Updates to reflect software changes, including:

• several new Program Parameters’
• updates to APC screen on horizontal milling machines
• new Edit Lockout feature
• Tool Cal Length editable field
• Part Setup Shift Offsets
• new Optional Stop softkey

04-0116-110 rK, June 2012

Revised by: H.Arle

Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, June 2012

Changes

• Updates to reflect software changes.

04-0116-110 rJ, December 2011

Revised by: H.Arle

Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, December 2011

Changes

• Updates to reflect software changes.

04-0116-110 rI, October 2011

Revised by: H.Arle

Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, October 2011

Changes

• Added Edit Program Lockout feature.

• Other updates to reflect software changes.

- 2 Record of Changes 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

04-0116-110 rH, August 2011

Revised by: H.Arle

Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, August 2011

Changes

• Added Plunge Outside Pocket parameter.

• Added Language Quick Toggle feature.
• Other updates to reflect software changes.

704-0116-110rG, June 2011

Revised by: H. Arle

Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, June 2011

Changes

• Updates to reflect software changes.

704-0116-110rF, December 2010

Revised by: H. Arle

Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, December 2010

Changes

• Updates to reflect software changes.

704-0116-110rE, October 2010

Revised by: H. Arle

Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, October 2010

Changes

• Added Enable Button section.

• Updates to reflect software changes.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Record of Changes -3

704-0116-110rD, August 2010

Revised by: H. Arle

Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, August 2010

Changes

• Updates to reflect software changes.

704-0116-110rC, May 2010

Revised by: H. Arle

Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, May 2010

Changes

• Added Dual-Zone Machining section

• Added LCD Remote Jog Unit section.
• Updates to reflect software changes.

704-0116-110rB, February 2010

Revised by: H. Arle

Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, February 2010

Changes

• Updates to reflect software changes.

704-0116-110rA, December 2009

Revised by: H. Arle

Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, December 2009

Changes

• Added Tool Change Optimization content.

• Added Manual Rapid Move content.
• Revisions to Absolute Tool section.
• Updates to reflect software changes from v7.3.

- 4 Record of Changes 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

 Hydraulic Status 5 - 20
INDEX Pallet in Machine 5 - 20
Pallet Status 5 - 20
Z-Axis Position 5 - 20
APC panel
Numerics Cancel Cycle pushbutton 5 - 22
Cycle Start pushbutton 5 - 22
10-base T 1 - 27
Emergency Stop pushbutton 5 - 22
24-station 5 - 8
APC Pin, APC diagnostics 5 - 20
APC Position, APC diagnostics 5 - 20
A APC Ready pushbutton 5 - 23
APC Reference, APC diagnostics 5 - 20
A Centerline
APC table, manual rotation 5 - 23
X/Y/ Z field 4 - 9
Append Tool and Material Database soft-
A Offset softkey 4 - 57
Abort Port Operation softkey, Serial I/O key, Import and Export 4 - 55
screen 3 - 39 APPLICATION FONT SIZE, User Interface
Absolute Tool Length mode 4 - 17 Settings 3 - 3
ACCELERATED DRAW F2 softkey, graphics Apply Border To Z 4 - 16
screen 4 - 66 arrow keys 1 - 14
access code 4 - 63 ATC 1 - 30, 5 - 7
changing 4 - 63 large tools 1 - 32
Active Error Listing 3 - 39 loading 1 - 31
Active Status Listing 3 - 40 tool removal 1 - 32
Add As Manual Tool softkey ATC & Machine Diagnostics Softkeys 5 - 16
Tool Review screen 4 - 37 ATC Axis Positions, ATC diagnostics,
Unmatched Tools Review 4 - 37 HTX500 5 - 12
ADD MATERIAL F1 softkey, Tool and Mate- ATC Diagnostics screen
rial Database screen 4 - 41 ATC Axis Positions, HTX500 5 - 12
ADD TOOL F1 softkey, Tool and Material ATC Door, HTX500 5 - 13
Database 4 - 41 ATC Status, HTX500 5 - 12
Add Tool softkey, Tool and Material Data- Exchange Arm, HTX500 5 - 13
base screen 4 - 41 Hydraulic Status, HTX500 5 - 13
Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 27 Magazine Position, HTX500 5 - 12
softkey 4 - 27 Magazine Status, HTX500 5 - 13
Air Pressure Spindle Status, HTX500 5 - 12
ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 Tool Holder, HTX500 5 - 12
machine diagnostics, HTCX500 5 - 11 Tool in Spindle, HTX500 5 - 12
Alt Dwell Lt Side, machine parameters 3 - Z-Axis Position, HTX500 5 - 12
16 ATC Diagnostics softkeys
Alt Washdown Dwell, machine parameters ATC Door Open / Close F2, HTX500 5 -
3 - 15 13
Alt Washdown Off Time, machine parame- Calibrate T/C Magazine F6, HTX500 5 -
ters 3 - 17 14
Angle field Exchange Arm 0° / 90° F5, HTX500 5 -
Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 13
APC 5 - 17 Exchange Arm 180° F6, HTX500 5 - 13
diagnostics 5 - 19 Magazine CCW F4, HTX500 5 - 14
Machine Function screen 5 - 18 Magazine CW F3, HTX500 5 - 14
Manual Table Release lever 5 - 23 Move Axes to TC Position F1, HTX500
squaring the table 5 - 17 5 - 13
APC Diagnostics screen Move Z-Axis to Zero F2, HTX500 5 - 13
APC Pin 5 - 20 Orient Spindle F1, HTX500 5 - 13
APC Position 5 - 20 Spindle Clamp / Unclamp F5, HTX500
APC Reference 5 - 20 5 - 13
ATC Status 5 - 20 Tool Holder 0° / 90° F3, HTX500 5 - 13

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Index — 1

ATC Disable, machine parameters 3 - 22 Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) parameter
ATC Door Open / Close F2, ATC diagnostics 3 - 29
softkey, HTX500 5 - 13 Axis Limit Switches field
ATC Door Open / Close softkey, ATC and Auto Mode 5 - 29
machine diagnostics 5 - 16 DRO 4 - 12
ATC Door, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - Axis, spindle, and machine control
15 location on console 1 - 11
ATC Door, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 13 Axis, spindle, and machine control, location
ATC Input Fields, ATC and machine diag- on console 1 - 12
nostics 5 - 15
ATC OK to Stop, ATC and machine diagnos-
tics 5 - 15 B
ATC Position field, ATC and machine diag- B Centerline X/Y/Z field 4 - 9
nostics 5 - 15 B Offset softkey 4 - 57
ATC Status, APC diagnostics 5 - 20 Backup Config & Machine Files 3 - 3
ATC Status, ATC and machine diagnostics softkey 3 - 2
5 - 15 Base 1 - 2
ATC Status, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - Baud Rate field, Serial Port Settings 3 - 32
12 Begin Reading from Port softkey, Serial I/O
ATC Status, machine diagnostics, HTX500 screen 3 - 39
5 - 11 Begin Writing to Port softkey, Serial I/O
ATC Z Axis Position field, ATC and machine screen 3 - 39
diagnostics 5 - 15 Blend Offset field, Milling Parameters 4 - 45
Auto Balance Enable, machine parameters Blend Overlap field, Milling Parameters 4 -
3 - 22 45
Auto console key 1 - 25 Block field
Auto Mode 4 - 61 Auto Mode 5 - 30
Monitoring 5 - 29 BORDER SIZE field 4 - 16
Auto Set Restart Marker 5 - 28 Bore Dwell field, Holes Parameters 4 - 50
Auto tab, Tool Library 4 - 39 Bore Orient Retract field, Holes Parameters
Automatic Centerline Calculation 3 - 33 4 - 50
automatic pallet changer 5 - 17 BOX LENGTH (X, Y, Z) field 4 - 15
automatic tool changer 5 - 7 BPRNT/DPRNT OUTPUT DEVICE, NC Set-
40-taper 5 - 8 tings 3 - 7
50-taper 5 - 9 BPRNT/DPRNT OUTPUT FILE, NC Settings
AUTOMATIC TOOL MONITORING field, 3-7
Probing Parameters 4 - 51 brightness control 1 - 12
AUTOMATICALLY LOAD TOOLS INTO MTC, location on console 1 - 11
Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 8 Bytes Transferred field, Serial I/O 3 - 39
AutoSave Settings 3 - 34
softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 8
Aux Output Confirmation Enable, machine
C
parameters 3 - 25 C Centerline X/Y/Z field 4 - 9
Aux Work Offsets C console key 1 - 14
LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 CAL to LS Velocity A 3 - 21
Auxiliary CAL to LS Velocity X 3 - 21
console key 1 - 14 Cal to LS Velocity, machine parameters 3 -
Mode 3 - 1 22
Auxiliary Work Offsets 4 - 14 calculator 1 - 8
Axes Status field, DRO 4 - 12 Calibrate Machine softkey, Manual Mode 5 -
axis 4
control 1 - 16 Calibrate T/C Magazine F5
select switch 1 - 18, 1 - 22 ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 16
Axis Feed Rate dial 1 - 16 ATC diagnostics softkeys, HTX500 5 -
14

2 - Index 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Calibrating the Machine 5 - 2 CLEAR TOOLS F6 softkey, Tool Library
Cancel Cycle pushbutton, APC panel 5 - 22 screen 4 - 40
CE Configuration field 4 - 62 Collapse and Expand Files 1 - 6
CE Diagnostics softkey 4 - 62 COLOR field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 28
CE Safety override mode 4 - 61 Column, machine component 1 - 2
CE Status & Diagnostics screen 4 - 62 Communications Panel 1 - 27
CE2000 4 - 61 Compute Estimated Run Time softkey, Auto
Chamfer Angle field, Advanced Tool Set- Mode 5 - 28
tings 4 - 29 console 1 - 2, 1 - 3
Change Access Code softkey 4 - 63 console buttons
Change All Feeds Speeds & Tools softkey Feed hold 1 - 24
4 - 56, 4 - 58 motion control buttons 1 - 24
change feeds 4 - 58 Motion hold 1 - 24
Change Feeds & Speeds by Tool softkey 4 - Console Jog Unit 1 - 12
56, 4 - 58 console keys 1 - 4
Change Finish SFQ field 4 - 58 Auto 1 - 25
change program blocks 4 - 56 C 1 - 14
Change Rough SFQ field 4 - 58 Delete 1 - 14
change speeds 4 - 58 End 1 - 14
Change Surface Finish Quality 4 - 58 Enter 1 - 14
Change Tool field 4 - 58 F 1 - 14
Change Tool Number 4 - 34 Home 1 - 14
softkey 4 - 34 Insert 1 - 14
Change Tool Number field 4 - 56 Interrupt cycle 1 - 25
Change Tool Number softkey 4 - 27 Machine Mode 1 - 25
Tool Library screen 4 - 40 Machine Mode ,Single 1 - 25
change tools 4 - 58 Machine Mode ,Test 1 - 25
Change Z-Start softkey 4 - 57 Machine Mode, Auto 1 - 25
changing access code 4 - 63 Page Down 1 - 14
Changing Feeds, Speeds, and Tools 4 - 58 Page Up 1 - 14
Character Length field, Serial Port Settings Single 1 - 25
3 - 32 Test 1 - 25
Check Calc Assist Inconsistencies, Conver- console knobs
sational Settings 3 - 6 Axis Feed Rate 1 - 16
Check for Errors softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 28 Rapid Override 1 - 16
Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time, machine pa- Spindle Speed 1 - 16
rameters 3 - 26 contrast control 1 - 12
Chip Conveyor On Delay Time, machine pa- control panel 1 - 11
rameters 3 - 26 Control Panel Function Groups 1 - 11
Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable, ma- Control Power Off Time, machine parame-
chine parameters 3 - 26 ters 3 - 20
Chip Removal field Control Power Off Timer 5 - 32
Auto Mode 5 - 29 Conversational Components 4 - 53
DRO 4 - 11 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAM F1 softkey,
Chip Removal Forward On/Off softkey, Auto Program Manager 2 - 2
Mode 5 - 30 CONVERSATIONAL SETTINGS, Utilities
Chip Removal Forward On/Off softkey,man- screen 3 - 6
ual mode 5 - 4 CONVERT TO LINEAR F7 softkey, Program
Chip Removal Reverse On/Off softkey, Review screen 4 - 60
manual mode 5 - 5 CONVERT TO ROTARY F6 softkey, Program
CHIPLOAD field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - Review screen 4 - 60
30 Coolant Delay Time 3 - 12
Choose as Replacement softkey 4 - 38 machine parameters 3 - 14
Chord Error field, General Parameters 4 - Coolant field 4 - 23
43 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 31

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Index — 3

coolant parameters, defined 3 - 13 Delete Sub Block softkey 4 - 60
Coolant Status, machine diagnostics, DELETE TOOL F3 softkey, Tool and Material
HTX500 5 - 11 Database screen 4 - 41
Coolant Washdown On/Off softkey, Auto Delete Tool softkey 4 - 25
Mode 5 - 31 Depletion Retract field, General Parameters
Copy and Change Blocks 4 - 56 4 - 44
Input screen 4 - 2 DESCRIPTION field, in Program Properties
Copy Blocks softkey 4 - 56 2-4
COPY DIRECTORY softkey Device field, Tool Measurement Settings 4 -
Disk Operations 2 - 5 18
copy program blocks 4 - 57 DIAGNOSTICS F3 softkey, Manual Mode 5 -
COPY softkey 4
Disk Operations 2 - 6 Diagnostics screen
Program Review screen 4 - 59 APC 5 - 19
Copy Tool softkey 4 - 34 Diagnostics softkey 4 - 62
CREATE DIRECTORY softkey Diameter field 4 - 22
Disk Operations 2 - 6 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29
cursor control 1 - 14 Diameter Tolerance field
cursor control buttons, LCD Remote Jog Probing Parameters 4 - 51
Unit 1 - 21 Diameter Wear field, Tool Setup screen 4 -
Custom NC File Extension, NC Settings 3 - 24
7 Digital Read Out 4 - 11
CUT DIRECTORY softkey Direction field
Disk Operations 2 - 5 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 28
CUT softkey Disable Auto On Chip Removal parameter
Disk Operations 2 - 6 3 - 29
Program Review screen 4 - 59 Disable Aux Out During Interrupt, machine
Cutter Comp Param field, Milling Parame- parameters 3 - 25
ters 4 - 47 Disable Tool Length Offset Table, NC Set-
Cutting Edges field, Advanced Tool Settings tings 3 - 7
4 - 29 Disable Tool Picker Option, machine pa-
Cutting Time field, Tool Setup screen 4 - 24 rameters 3 - 20
Cycle Start pushbutton, APC panel 5 - 22 Disk Operations 2 - 5
softkey, Program Manager 2 - 4
Display Machine Specifications softkey 3 -
D 2
DB SEARCH F6 softkey, graphics screen 4 - DISPLAY UNITS field, in Program Properties
67 2-4
Default Pocket Overlap field, Milling Param- Display Warning Message, Tool Utilities and
eters 4 - 47 Settings 3 - 10
DEFAULT XML PROGRAM TYPE, Conversa- Display WinMax Configuration softkey 3 - 2
tional Settings 3 - 6 Door Lock Status field 4 - 62
Default Zoom softkey Door Switch Status field 4 - 62
graphics screen 4 - 67 DRAW (PAUSE) softkey, graphics screen
Delete Block softkey 4 - 60 4 - 66
Delete Blocks softkey 4 - 56 DRAW OPTIONS softkey, graphics screen
DELETE DIRECTORY softkey 4 - 66
Disk Operations 2 - 6 Drill Angle field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 -
Delete key 1 - 14 29
DELETE MATERIAL F3 softkey, Tool and Ma- Drill Dwell field, Holes Parameters 4 - 50
terial Database screen 4 - 41 drive
delete program blocks 4 - 57 jump 1 - 29
Delete softkey DRO 4 - 11
Disk Operations 2 - 6 drop-down lists 1 - 6
Program Review screen 4 - 60 Dry Run softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 28

4 - Index 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Dual 3 - 30 Exchange Arm 0° / 90° F5, ATC diagnostics
Dual Tool Probe Present parameter 3 - 30 softkeys, HTX500 5 - 13
Dual-Zone Machining 5 - 24 Exchange Arm 0º / 60º, ATC & Machine Di-
agnostics 5 - 16
Exchange Arm 180° F6, ATC diagnostics
E softkeys, HTX500 5 - 13
Edit Apt Parameters 4 - 33 Exchange Arm field, ATC and machine diag-
Edit Lockout 3 - 4 nostics 5 - 15
Edit Lockout Level field 3 - 5 Exchange Arm Jog Reverse F4, ATC and
EDIT MATERIAL softkey, Tool and Material machine diagnostics 5 - 16
Database screen 4 - 41 Exchange Arm Rotate F5, ATC and machine
EDIT MODE, User Interface Settings 3 - 4 diagnostics 5 - 16
EDIT TOOL softkey, Tool and Material Data- Exchange Arm, ATC diagnostics, HTX500
base screen 4 - 41 5 - 13
EIR Relay State field 4 - 62 Expand and Collapse Files 1 - 6
Emergency APC panel 5 - 22 Export 4 - 55
Emergency Stop 5 - 31 EXPORT AUTO AND MANUAL TOOLS soft-
button 1 - 13 key, Import and Export 4 - 55
LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 Export Log 3 - 42
location on console 1 - 11, 1 - 12 Export Manual Tools List softkey, Import
Emergency stop and Export 4 - 55
location on console 1 - 11 Export Tool and Material Database softkey,
ENABLE AUTOMATIC SAVE, Autosave Set- Import and Export 4 - 55
tings 3 - 8 Exported NC Decimal Places field, NC Set-
Enable Button 1 - 12 tings 3 - 7
Enable button, LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21
Enable Dual Zones 5 - 24
Enable Dual Zones parameter 3 - 20 F
Enable FTP Server field F console key 1 - 14
FTP Server Settings 3 - 33 F(%) field
ENABLE PROJECT RESTORE, User Interface Auto Mode 5 - 29
Settings 3 - 4 DRO 4 - 12
Enable Reset at Program Start, NC Settings Feed & Speed Optimization softkey, Auto
3-8 Mode 5 - 27
ENABLE RUNTIME TOOL DISPLAY field, Feed and Speed 4 - 30, 4 - 31
Graphics Settings 4 - 64 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 30
Enable Tool Life Monitoring, Tool Utilities Calculations 4 - 31
and Settings 3 - 10 Feed field 4 - 24
Enable Tool SFQ field, Advanced Tool Set- Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 31
tings 4 - 32 Auto Mode 5 - 29
Enable Variable Monitoring, NC Settings 3 - DRO 4 - 11
7 Feed Hold console button 1 - 24
End Block field 4 - 56, 4 - 58 Feed/Flute (Tooth) field 4 - 24
End Block softkey 4 - 57 Finish Feed (%) 4 - 46
End key 1 - 14 Finish Plunge Helix Radius field, Helical
Enter Access Code softkey 4 - 63 Plunge Milling Parameters 4 - 49
Enter key 1 - 14 Finish Plunge Ramp Slope field, Helical
entering the access code 4 - 63 Plunge Milling Parameters 4 - 48
Erase Functions 4 - 2 Finish Plunge Type field, Helical Plunge Mill-
Input screen 4 - 2 ing Parameters 4 - 48
ERASE PART SETUP softkey 4 - 2 Finish SFQ field 4 - 58
ERASE PROGRAM softkey 4 - 2 Finish Speed (%) 4 - 46
ERASE TOOL SETUP softkey 4 - 2 Finish XY field, Milling Parameters 4 - 46
Error History 3 - 40 Finish Z field, Milling Parameters 4 - 47
European machines 1 - 2

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Index — 5

First Peck Offset field, General Parameters ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 13
4 - 44 Hydraulic Status, machine diagnostics,
Fit to View softkey HTX500 5 - 11
graphics screen 4 - 67
Flutes field 4 - 24
Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 I
formula icons A - xi
Washdown Off Delay Timer 3 - 18 Import / Export Functions 4 - 53
Washdown On Delay Timer 3 - 17 Import and Export 4 - 55
FTP Manager 2 - 6 Import Functions
FTP Manager softkey Input screen 4 - 2
Disk Operations 2 - 6 Import Into Manual Tool List softkey, Im-
FTP Server port and Export 4 - 55
Port field, FTP Server Settings 3 - 33 Import Manual Tools, Import and Export 4 -
FTP Server Settings 55
softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 33 Import softkey 2 - 2
Full Precision Editing 1 - 5 Importing NC States into Conversational
Programs 4 - 54
indexer port 1 - 29
G Input
G05.3 Surface Finish Quality 4 - 32 key 1 - 14
Gauge Device setup, with Absolute Tool Input Mode 4 - 2
Length Mode 4 - 18 Insert Arc field, Milling Parameters 4 - 47
General Parameters 1 4 - 43 Insert Block / Sub Block Before softkey 4 -
General Parameters 2 4 - 44 60
Geometry, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 28 Insert key 1 - 14
Graphics 4 - 64 Insert Line field, Milling Parameters 4 - 48
Graphics Chord Error field, Graphics Set- INSERT TOOL F3 softkey, Tool Library
tings 4 - 65 screen 4 - 40
Graphics screen, location on console 1 - 11 Integrator Configuration Parameters, N95
Graphics Settings 4 - 64 codes 3 - 19
for Stock Geomety 4 - 15 INTEGRATOR SUPPORT SERIVICES F4 soft-
softkey 4 - 64 key, Utilities screen 3 - 35
softkey, graphics screen 4 - 67 Integrator Support Services 3 - 38
Interrupt console key 1 - 25
Interrupt Cycle Z Retract field, General Pa-
H rameters 4 - 44
hardware options 1 - 2
HD3 Save Program Type, Conversational
Settings 3 - 6 J
Height field, Tool Measurement Settings 4 - jog
18 control buttons 1 - 17
Help parameters 1 - 19
On-screen Help 1 - 9 Jog Feed Override 1 - 22
Help key 1 - 14 jog unit 1 - 17
HMX 3 - 11 jump drive 1 - 29
HMX Machine Diagnostics 5 - 11
HMX pallet change 5 - 17
HMX630 tool magazine 5 - 10 K
Holes Parameters 4 - 50 keyboard 1 - 4, 1 - 8, 1 - 13
Home key 1 - 14 optional 1 - 15
HTX 3 - 11
HTX500 tool magazine 5 - 10
Hydraulic Status
APC diagnostics 5 - 20

6 - Index 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

L Machine Operation Keys 1 - 12
Machine Operations 1 - 25
Ladder File Configuration softkey 3 - 2
Machine operations, location on console 1 -
Language File Configuration softkey 3 - 2
11
Language Quick Toggle 3 - 34
Machine Parameters 3 - 11
Language Selection 3 - 34
Alt Dwell Lt Side 3 - 16
large tools in the ATC magazine 1 - 32
Alt Washdown Dwell 3 - 15
LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 20
Alt Washdown Off Time 3 - 17
LCD screen, LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21
ATC Disable 3 - 22
Length of Cut field, Advanced Tool Settings
Auto Balance Enable 3 - 22
4 - 29
Aux Output Confirmation Enable 3 - 25
Limited Manual Operations field 4 - 62
Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) 3 - 29
List Control Rows field, User Interface Set-
Cal to LS Velocity 3 - 22
tings 3 - 4
CAL to LS Velocity A 3 - 21
List Icon Size field, User Interface Settings
CAL to LS Velocity X 3 - 21
3-4
Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time 3 - 26
Load softkey 2 - 2
Chip Conveyor On Delay Time 3 - 26
Disk Operations 2 - 6
Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable 3 -
loading
26
tool in the spindle 1 - 30
Control Power Off Time 3 - 20
tools in ATC magazine 1 - 31
Coolant Delay Time 3 - 12, 3 - 14
Location field 4 - 21
Disable Auto On Chip Removal 3 - 29
Log Files 3 - 35, 3 - 39
Disable Aux Out During Interrupt 3 - 25
Disable Tool Picker Option 3 - 20
M Dual Tool Probe Present 3 - 30
machine Enable Dual Zones 3 - 20
Auto mode key 1 - 25 Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC
components 1 - 2 3 - 26
control 1 - 16 Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable
control buttons 1 - 24 3 - 14
major components 1 - 2 Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) 3 - 30
mode console keys 1 - 25 Rapid Override Disable 3 - 22
Single mode console key 1 - 25 Tilt Axis Safety Position 3 - 23
Test mode console key 1 - 25 Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate 3 - 28
Machine and Console Basics 1 - 1 Warm-up Axis Feed Rate 3 - 29
Machine and Part Axes field, Auto Mode 5 - Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass 3 - 28
29 Warm-up Cycle Time Per Pass 3 - 29
Machine and Part Axes field, DRO 4 - 11 Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed 3 - 28
Machine Class field 3 - 2 Warm-up Max Spindle Speed 3 - 29
Machine Components 1 - 2 Warm-Up Speed Steps 3 - 28
Machine Coordinate Relative 3 - 33 Warm-up Speed Steps 3 - 29
machine coordinate system, part setup 4 - Warm-Up Starting Speed 3 - 28
5 Warm-up Starting Speed 3 - 29
Machine Diagnostics screen Washdown Off Delay Timer 3 - 12, 3 -
Air Pressure, HTX500 5 - 11 18
ATC Status,HTX500 5 - 11 Washdown On Delay Timer 3 - 17
Coolant Status, HTX500 5 - 11 X-Axis Safety Position 3 - 21
Hydraulic Status, HTX500 5 - 11 Y-Axis Safety Position 3 - 21
Overload Status, HTX500 5 - 12 Machine Specifications softkey
Spindle Chiller, HTX500 5 - 12 Utilities screen 3 - 2
Spindle Status, HTX500 5 - 11 Magazine CCW F4, ATC diagnostics soft-
Tool in Spindle, HTX500 5 - 11 keys, HTX500 5 - 14
Way Lube Level, HTX500 5 - 11 Magazine CCW F5, ATC and machine diag-
MACHINE FUNCTION softkey 5 - 18 nostics 5 - 16
Machine Hour Meter field 3 - 2

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Index — 7

Magazine CW F3, ATC diagnostics softkeys, Max console
HTX500 5 - 14 console keys 1 - 12
Magazine CW, ATC and machine diagnos- panel group figure 1 - 12
tics 5 - 16 panel groups 1 - 12
Magazine field, DRO 4 - 12 Max Depth field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 -
Magazine In Position, ATC and machine di- 30
agnostics 5 - 15 Max Memory Load field 3 - 4
Magazine Lock, ATC and machine diagnos- Maximum Contouring Rate field 3 - 3
tics 5 - 15 Maximum Diameter Difference, Tool Utili-
Magazine Pin Lock / Unlock F2, ATC and ties and Settings 3 - 9
machine diagnostics 5 - 16 Maximum Idle Time (Mins) field
Magazine Position field, ATC and machine FTP Server Settings 3 - 33
diagnostics 5 - 15 Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate field 3 - 3
Magazine Position, ATC diagnostics, Maximum Spindle Motor Speed field 3 - 2
HTX500 5 - 12 Maximum Spindle Tool Speed field 3 - 2
Magazine Reference, ATC and machine di- Mill Plunge Helix Radius field, Helical Plunge
agnostics 5 - 15 Milling Parameters 4 - 48
Magazine Status, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 Mill Plunge Ramp Slope field, Helical Plunge
5 - 13 Milling Parameters 4 - 48
manual APC table rotation 5 - 23 Mill Plunge Type field, Helical Plunge Milling
Manual Border Sizing 4 - 16 Parameters 4 - 48
Manual Border Sizing field 4 - 15 Milling Direction field, Milling Parameters
Manual console key 1 - 25 4 - 47
Manual Function Setup 5 - 4 Milling Parameters 1 4 - 45
softkey, Manual Mode 5 - 4 Milling Parameters 2 4 - 48
manual jog Minus/Plus A/B/C Direction Travel Limit
feed keys 1 - 18, 1 - 21 field 3 - 3
feed parameter 1 - 19 Minus/Plus X Direction Travel Limit field 3 -
hand wheel 1 - 18, 1 - 21 3
hand wheel multiplier keys 1 - 18, 1 - Minus/Plus Y Direction Travel Limit field 3 -
21 3
Manual Jog Feed field, Manual Mode 5 - 4 Mode 1 - 21
Manual Mode 4 - 61 Mode Selector buttons, LCD Remote Jog
LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 Unit 1 - 21
Tool Library 4 - 39 Modify Dimensions 4 - 57
Manual Rapid Move 5 - 5 softkey 4 - 56
softkey, Manual Mode 5 - 4 Monitored Variable Number, NC Settings
Manual Spindle Speed field, Manual Mode 3-8
5-4 Motion Configuration softkey 3 - 2
Manual Spindle Speed parameter 1 - 19 Motion Hold button 1 - 24
Manual Stock Sizing field 4 - 15 Motion Hold button, LCD Remote Jog Unit
Manual tab, Tool Library 4 - 40 1 - 21
Manual Table Release lever, APC Table 5 - Move Axes to T/C Position softkey, ATC and
23 machine diagnostics 5 - 16
Mark Tool Defective, Tool Utilities and Set- Move Axes to TC Position F1, ATC diagnos-
tings 3 - 10 tics softkeys, HTX500 5 - 13
Match Tools softkey Move Blocks softkey 4 - 56
Tool Review screen 4 - 37 move program blocks 4 - 57
Unmatched Tools Review 4 - 37 Move to Safe Pos During TC field, General
Matching tools 4 - 37 Parameters 4 - 44
Material Database 4 - 41 Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC, ma-
Material field, in Program Properties 2 - 4 chine parameters 3 - 26
Math Assist Style, Conversational Settings Move Tool To Spindle softkey, Tool Library
3-6 screen 4 - 39, 4 - 40

8 - Index 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Move Z-Axis to T/C Height F6, ATC and ma- DRO 4 - 11
chine diagnostics 5 - 16 optional keyboard 1 - 15
Move Z-Axis to Zero Position F2, ATC diag- Optional Stop On/Off softkey, Auto Mode
nostics softkeys, HTX500 5 - 13 5 - 30
Move Z-Axis to Zero, ATC and machine di- options
agnostics 5 - 16 hardware and software 1 - 2
Multiple Block Functions softkey, Program Orient Spindle F1, ATC diagnostics soft-
Review screen 4 - 59 keys, HTX500 5 - 13
Orient Spindle softkey, Manual Mode 5 - 4
Orient Spindle, ATC and machine diagnos-
N tics 5 - 16
N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Pa- Orientation field, DRO 4 - 11
rameters) 3 - 19 orientation hole 1 - 30
NAME field, in Program Properties 2 - 4 orientation key 1 - 30
NC dialect 2 - 4 Overload Status, machine diagnostics,
NC Dialect field, NC Settings 3 - 7 HTX500 5 - 12
NC Display Type, NC Settings 3 - 7 override
NC Monitor softkey knobs 1 - 16
Auto Mode 5 - 31 Override Lockout field, General Parameters
NC/Conversational Merge 5 - 29 4 - 43
NC Program softkey, Program Manager 2 - Overwrite Existing Zero Calibration, Tool
2 Utilities and Settings 3 - 9
NC Settings softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 7
NC SFQ, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 32
NC States 4 - 53 P
NC Variables 4 - 54 Page Down key 1 - 14
Neck Diameter field, Advanced Tool Set- Page Up key 1 - 14
tings 4 - 29 pallet changer 5 - 17
network 1 - 27 Manual Table Release lever 5 - 23
network ports 1 - 29 manual table rotation 5 - 23
New Feed field 4 - 56, 4 - 58 pallet diagnostics
New Finish Tool field 4 - 56, 4 - 58 APC Pin 5 - 20
New Plunge Feed field 4 - 56, 4 - 58 APC Position 5 - 20
New softkey, Program Manager 2 - 2 APC Reference 5 - 20
New Speed (RPM) field 4 - 56, 4 - 58 ATC Status 5 - 20
New Tool field 4 - 56, 4 - 58 Hydraulic Status 5 - 20
Next Tool Change softkey, graphics screen Pallet in Machine 5 - 20
4 - 66 Pallet Status 5 - 20
Next Tool field, Tool Library screen 4 - 39 Z-Axis Position 5 - 20
Notes field, Tool Measurement Settings 4 - Pallet in Machine, APC diagnostics 5 - 20
18 Pallet Status, APC diagnostics 5 - 20
Notes, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 33 Pan softkey
Number of Axes Present field 3 - 2 graphics screen 4 - 67
numeric keypad 1 - 15 parameters
jog unit 1 - 19
manual jog feed 1 - 19
O manual spindle speed 1 - 19
Offset Z field 4 - 9, 4 - 20 Parity field, Serial Port Settings 3 - 32
On-screen Help 1 - 9 Park Machine 5 - 32
Open softkey 2 - 2 softkey, Manual Mode 5 - 4
operating the APC 5 - 18 Part Count field, Auto Mode 5 - 30
Operator Specify Pocket Start field, Helical Part Fixturing and Tool Loading 4 - 13
Plunge Milling Parameters 4 - 49 Part Inspection files 3 - 38
Opt Stop On (Off) field Part Kinematics Z Reference 3 - 33, 4 - 18
Auto Mode 5 - 29

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Index — 9

part program port
printing 3 - 35 pin descriptions 1 - 28
Part Program Printing softkey 3 - 35 USB 1 - 29
Part Program Tool Review 4 - 34 Power Drawbar 1 - 2
softkey 4 - 27, 4 - 60 Power On button 1 - 24
Part Program Tool Review Softkeys 4 - 36 location on console 1 - 11, 1 - 12
Part Program Tool Review, NC Programs 4 - Printing
35 Part Program 3 - 35
Part Programming Probing Data 3 - 38
Input screen 4 - 2 Printing Setup 3 - 35
softkey 4 - 25, 4 - 60 softkey, in Utilities screen 3 - 35
softkey, Tool Review screen 4 - 36 Probing Data Printing 3 - 38
Part Setup 4 - 3 softkey 3 - 35
Calculate Rotary Offsets 4 - 12 Probing Parameters 4 - 51
fields 4 - 9 Program Manager 2 - 1
LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 Input screen 4 - 2
Orient Spindle 4 - 12 Program Parameters 4 - 42
Part Probing 4 - 12 Input screen 4 - 2
Part Programming 4 - 12 Program Parameters softkey 4 - 27, 4 - 60
Program Parameters 4 - 12 Tool Review screen 4 - 36
softkey 4 - 25, 4 - 60 Program Properties 2 - 4
softkey, Tool Review screen 4 - 36 Program Review screen 4 - 59
Stock Geometry 4 - 12 Program Run Time field
Store Machine Position 4 - 12 Auto Mode 5 - 29
Toggle Units 4 - 12 DRO 4 - 11
Tool Setup 4 - 12 PROGRAM TYPE, in Program Properties 2 -
Work Offsets 4 - 12 4
Part Setup softkeys 4 - 12 Programming Keyboard, location on con-
Part Surface field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64 sole 1 - 11, 1 - 12
Part Zero A / B field 4 - 9 programming mode keys 1 - 14
Part Zero X / Y fields 4 - 9 Protocol field, Serial Port Settings 3 - 32
Part Zero Z field 4 - 9 Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable, ma-
Part Zero Z Shift field 4 - 9 chine parameters 3 - 14
Password field Put Block Before field 4 - 56
FTP Server Settings 3 - 33
Paste Into Directory softkey
Disk Operations 2 - 5 R
Paste softkey R(%) field, Auto Mode 5 - 29
Disk Operations 2 - 6 R(%) field, DRO 4 - 12
Program Review screen 4 - 59 Radius field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29
PATH field Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) parame-
in Program Properties 2 - 4 ter 3 - 30
Path field Rapid Override dial 1 - 16
FTP Server Settings 3 - 33 Rapid Override Disable, machine parame-
Peck Clearance Plane field, General Param- ters 3 - 22
eters 4 - 43 Rapid Traverse field, General Parameters
Peck Depth field 4 - 43
Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 31 RAPIDS field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64
Performance Parameters 4 - 52 Ream Chamfer field, Advanced Tool Set-
Plunge Feed field tings 4 - 29
Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 31 Recovery and Restart 5 - 3
Plunges field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64 Recovery Restart softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 28
Pocket Plunge Near Center field, Milling 2 Remote jog
Parameters 4 - 49 location on console 1 - 11
pop-ups 1 - 7

10 - Index 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

remote jog override mode 4 - 61
unit 1 - 17 Safety Work Region field 4 - 10
remote jog unit 1 - 17 SAVE 2 - 3
removing tools from the ATC 1 - 32 SAVE ACTIVE PROGRAM ONLY, Autosave
RENAME DIRECTORY F5 softkey Settings 3 - 8
Disk Operations 2 - 6 SAVE AS 2 - 3
RENAME F4 softkey SAVE AS USER DEFAULTS F4 softkey, Pro-
Disk Operations 2 - 6 gram Parameters 4 - 42
Replace Tool and Material Database soft- SAVE FREQUENCY, Autosave Settings 3 - 8
key, Import and Export 4 - 55 Save NC State with Program, NC Settings
Reset Control 5 - 3 3-7
Reset End Marker Save to Database softkey 4 - 38
Auto Mode 5 - 28 screen
Reset Part Count softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 30 CE Status & Diagnostics 4 - 62
RESET PROGRAM PARAMETERS F3 4 - 2 Screen Configuration, User Interface Set-
Reset Restart Marker 5 - 28 tings 3 - 3
Reset Servos and Spindle softkey, Manual SCREENSAVER TIMEOUT, User Interface
Mode 5 - 4 Settings 3 - 4
restart after emergency stop 1 - 13 Select DRO softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 30
Restart Control 5 - 33 SELECT LANGUAGE softkey, Utilities screen
Utilities screen 3 - 35, 5 - 33 3 - 34
Restart Markers, NC 5 - 28 SELECT MATERIAL FOR PART PROGRAM F5
Restore Config & Machine Files 3 - 3 softkey, Tool and Material Database
softkey 3 - 2 screen 4 - 41
RESTORE USER DEFAULTS F5 softkey, Pro- Select Surface 4 - 52
gram Parameters 4 - 42 SELECT VIEW F2 softkey, graphics screen
RESTORE WINMAX DEFAULTS F6 softkey, 4 - 66
Program Parameters 4 - 42 SelectSurface Finish Quality 4 - 42, 4 - 52
Retain Probed Part Setup field, Probing Pa- Serial I/O 3 - 35, 3 - 39
rameters 4 - 51 Serial Numbers Printing
Retract Clearance field, General Parameters softkey 3 - 35
4 - 43 Serial Port Settings 3 - 32
Retract Tool softkey, Manual Mode 5 - 4 SERIAL PORT SETTINGS F1 softkey, Utili-
Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files 3 - 41 ties screen 3 - 3
Review key 1 - 14 serial ports 1 - 28
Review Mode 4 - 59 Servo Power 5 - 2
Review, Tools in Part Program 4 - 34 Set End Marker
Rotary Axes Parameters 3 - 33, 4 - 18 Auto Mode 5 - 28
Rotary Axis ISO Standard 3 - 33 Set Length Using Touch-Off Device softkey
Rotary Centerline X/Y/Z 3 - 33 4 - 26
Rotary Jog Feed, Manual Mode 5 - 4 Set Restart Marker 5 - 28
ROTATE F5 softkey, graphics screen 4 - 67 Set Tool Zero softkey 4 - 25
Rough SFQ field 4 - 58 Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block softkey 4 -
RS-232 C 26
serial communications 1 - 27 SFQ 4 - 52
serial port 1 - 28 Shank Diameter field 4 - 22
Run Program softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 29 Shank Diameter field, Advanced Tool Set-
tings 4 - 29
shift offset 4 - 13
S SHOW ALL FILE TYPES, User Interface Set-
S(%) field tings 3 - 4
Auto Mode 5 - 29 SHOW GRAPHICS field, Graphics Settings
DRO 4 - 12 4 - 64
safety Show Roughing Tool Path for 2D Surfaces
CE safety circuit switches 4 - 61 field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Index — 11

SHOW Roughing Tool Path for 3D Surfaces Start Block softkey 4 - 57
field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64 Start Coordinate Reference, Probing Pa-
Shutdown Control 5 - 33 rameters 4 - 51
SHUTDOWN CONTROL F6 softkey, Utilities Start Cycle console button 1 - 24
screen 3 - 35 Start Marker, NC 5 - 28
SHUTDOWN CONTROL softkey Start Pushbutton, ATC and machine diag-
Utilities screen 5 - 33 nostics 5 - 15
Single console key 1 - 25 Status Bar 1 - 8
single key 1 - 25 Status field, Serial I/O 3 - 39
SINGLE STEP F3 softkey, graphics screen Status History 3 - 41
4 - 66 Stock Allowance Mode, Milling Parameters
Smoothing Tolerance 4 - 52 4 - 46
SNAPSHOT F7 softkey, graphics screen 4 - Stock Geometry 4 - 15
67 Part Setup 4 - 15
SOFTKEY MENU POSITION, User Interface Stock Geometry screen
Settings 3 - 4 Apply Border to Z 4 - 16
softkeys 1 - 4, 1 - 5, 1 - 13 BORDER SIZE 4 - 16
software options 1 - 2 MANUAL BORDER SIZING 4 - 15
Software Options softkey 3 - 2 Manual Border Sizing 4 - 16
Software Version softkey 3 - 2 MANUAL STOCK SIZING 4 - 15
special function keys 1 - 14 STOCK TYPE 4 - 15
Speed (RPM) field 4 - 23 X REF POSITION 4 - 15
SPEED field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 31 X/Y/Z Length 4 - 15
Spindle 1 - 2, 1 - 30 Y REF POSITION 4 - 15
spindle Z REF POSITION 4 - 15
control 1 - 16 ZERO REF 4 - 15
manual speed 1 - 19 STOCK OUTLINE field, Graphics Settings
tool removal 1 - 30 4 - 64
Spindle Chiller, machine diagnostics, STOCK OUTLINE, Graphics Settings 4 - 15
HTX500 5 - 12 Stock Transparency field, Graphics Settings
Spindle Clamp / Unclamp F5, ATC diagnos- 4 - 64
tics softkeys, HTX500 5 - 13 STOCK TYPE field 4 - 15
Spindle Clamp, ATC and machine diagnos- Stop Bits field, Serial Port Settings 3 - 32
tics 5 - 15 Stop Cycle button, LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 -
Spindle Clamp/Unclamp F4 5 - 16 21
Spindle field Stop Cycle console button 1 - 24
Auto Mode 5 - 29 Store Position key 1 - 18, 1 - 21
DRO 4 - 11 Stylus Length field, Advanced Tool Settings
Spindle Load Monitor field, Auto Mode 5 - 4 - 29
29 Supplier, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 33
Spindle Motor 1 - 2 Surface Finish Quality 4 - 52
Spindle Orientation, ATC and machine di- G05.3 4 - 32
agnostics 5 - 15 Surface Speed field
Spindle Speed dial 1 - 16 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 30
Spindle Status, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 FPM 4 - 24
5 - 12 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION F1 softkey, Utili-
Spindle Status, machine diagnostics, ties screen 3 - 2
HTX500 5 - 11
Spindle tab, Tool Library 4 - 39
Spindle Unclamp button 1 - 30 T
Spindle Unclamp PB, ATC and machine di- Table 1 - 2
agnostics 5 - 15 Tap Retract (%) field, Holes Parameters 4 -
squaring the APC table 5 - 17 50
Standard Calculator 3 - 6 Test console key 1 - 25
Start Block field 4 - 56, 4 - 58 Test key 1 - 25

12 - Index 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Text screen 1 - 14 TOOL IN SPINDLE field, Tool Library screen
location on console 1 - 11 4 - 39
Thread Diameter field 4 - 23 Tool Information Printing
Thread Diameter field, Advanced Tool Set- softkey 3 - 35
tings 4 - 29 Tool Length field, Advanced Tool Settings
Threads per inch field, Advanced Tool Set- 4 - 29
tings 4 - 29 Tool Library 4 - 39
Tilt Axis Preference 3 - 33 Auto 4 - 39
Tilt Axis Safety Position, machine parame- Manual 4 - 39, 4 - 40
ters 3 - 23 Spindle 4 - 39
time 1 - 8 tool magazine
Tip Angle field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - HMX630 5 - 10
29 HTX5000 5 - 10
Tip Diameter field, Advanced Tool Settings VTXU 5 - 10
4 - 29 Tool Management softkey, Manual Mode 5 -
Tip Length field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 4
29 Tool Matching 4 - 37
Toggle Edit Lockout State softkey 3 - 1, 3 - Results 4 - 38
4 Tool Measurement 4 - 18
Toggle Language 3 - 34 Tool Measurement screen 4 - 18
Toggle Rapid Override Enable softkey, Auto Tool Measurement Settings softkey 4 - 27
Mode 5 - 31 Tool Number field 4 - 21
tool Tool Offsets softkey 4 - 25
holder, orientation hole 1 - 30 TOOL PATH field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64
in Spindle 1 - 30 Tool Pocket 5 - 15
loading, machine spindle 1 - 30 Tool Probing softkey 4 - 27
removal from ATC magazine 1 - 32 TOOL REVIEW
removal from spindle 1 - 30 Input Screen 4 - 2
Tool & Material Library 4 - 39 Tool Setup 4 - 21
Tool and Material Database 4 - 41 LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21
Tool Cal Length field 4 - 22 Tool Setup Fields 4 - 21, 4 - 24
Tool Calibration Mode field, Tool Utilities Coolant 4 - 23
and Settings 3 - 8 Cutting Time 4 - 24
Tool Change Optimization field, General Pa- Diameter 4 - 22
rameters 4 - 44 Diameter Wear 4 - 24
Tool Change Review Screen softkey Feed 4 - 24
Tool Review Screen 4 - 36 Feed/Flute (Tooth) 4 - 24
tool changer 1 - 30 Flutes 4 - 24
orientation key 1 - 30 Location 4 - 21
tool changer (see Automatic Tool Changer) Shank Diameter 4 - 22
5-7 Speed (RPM) 4 - 23
Tool Geometry 4 - 28 Surface Speed (FPM) 4 - 24
Tool Holder 5 - 15 Thread Diameter 4 - 23
ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 12 Tool Cal Length 4 - 22
Tool Holder 0° / 90° F3, ATC diagnostics Tool Number 4 - 21
softkeys, HTX500 5 - 13 Tool Type 4 - 22
Tool Holder Up / Down, ATC and machine Touch-Off Device 4 - 22
diagnostics 5 - 16 TPI (or PITCH) 4 - 23
Tool Home softkey 4 - 25 Zero Calibration 4 - 22
Tool in Spindle Tool Setup softkey
ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 12 Tool Review screen 4 - 36
machine diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 11 Tool Setup Softkeys 4 - 25, 4 - 27
Tool in Spindle field Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 27
Auto Mode 5 - 29 Change Tool Number 4 - 27
DRO 4 - 11 Delete Tool 4 - 25

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Index — 13

 Part Program Tool Review 4 - 27 V
Part Programming 4 - 25
Variable Reset Value, NC Settings 3 - 8
Part Setup 4 - 25
Vertical/Horizontal field 3 - 2
Program Parameters 4 - 27
VTX 3 - 11
Set Length Using Touch-Off Device 4 -
VTXU
26
tool magazine 5 - 10
Set Tool Zero 4 - 25
VTXZ 5 - 24
Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block 4 - 26
Tool Home 4 - 25
Tool Measurement Settings 4 - 27 W
Tool Offsets 4 - 25 Warm Up Machine softkey, Manual Mode
Tool Probing 4 - 27 5-4
Tool Type field 4 - 22 Warming Up the Machine 5 - 2
Tool Type Setup/Advanced Tool Settings Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate 3 - 28, 3 - 29
4 - 41 Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass 3 - 28, 3 -
Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 8 29
Toolpath and Solid Graphics 4 - 66 Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed 3 - 28
Toolpath Graphics 4 - 66 Warm-up Max Spindle Speed 3 - 29
Touch-Off Device field 4 - 22 Warm-Up Speed Steps 3 - 28, 3 - 29
Tool Measurement Settings 4 - 18 Warm-Up Starting Speed 3 - 28, 3 - 29
touchscreen 1 - 4 WARN BEFORE SAVING IN OLD FORMAT,
Touchscreen softkeys, location on console User Interface Settings 3 - 4
1 - 11 washdown
TPI (or PITCH) field 4 - 23 Y-axis rear way cover 3 - 13
Trackball, location on console 1 - 11 Washdown Coolant On/Off softkey, Manual
Transfer 2 - 6 Mode 5 - 5
transfer files Washdown Off Delay Timer 3 - 12, 3 - 18
jump drive 1 - 29 recommended formula 3 - 18
Washdown On Delay Timer 3 - 17
U recommended formula 3 - 17
Way Cover 1 - 2
Ultimax 4 and Max consoles 1 - 3
Way Lube Level
Ultimax classic edit mode 1 - 4
ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15
Ultimax Classic Math Assist 3 - 6
machine diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 11
unit of measure 1 - 8
WinMax Configuration softkey
UNLOAD PROGRAM F5 4 - 2
Utilities screen 3 - 2
unrotated coordinate system, part setup
WinMax IP Address softkey 3 - 2
4-5
WINMAX UPTIME F3 softkey, Utilities
USB Port 1 - 12
screen 3 - 33
USB port 1 - 29
Work Offsets 4 - 13
USE CHORD ERROR FROM PROGRAM field,
LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21
Graphics Settings 4 - 65
Worklight On/Off softkey
Use Editing File softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 27
Auto Mode 5 - 31
USE TOOL TYPE CHECKING, Tool Utilities
Manual Mode 5 - 5
and Settings 3 - 8
workpiece coordinate system, part setup
User defined value 4 - 31
4-5
USER INTERFACE SETTTINGS softkey, Util-
WRITE PROTECTION field, in Program Prop-
ities screen 3 - 3
erties 2 - 4
User Name field, FTP Server Settings 3 - 33
USER PREFERENCES softkey, Utilities
screen 3 - 3 X
Utilities 3 - 1 X Offset softkey 4 - 57
X REF POSITION field 4 - 15
X-Axis Safety Position 3 - 21

14 - Index 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Y
Y Offset softkey 4 - 57
Y REF POSITION field 4 - 15
Y-axis rear way cover washdown on and off
cycles 3 - 13
Y-Axis Safety Position 3 - 21

Z
Z Location field, Tool Measurement Settings
4 - 18
Z Offset softkey 4 - 57
Z REF POSITION field 4 - 15
Z Reference position, setting 4 - 18
Z Reference, Tool Measurement Settings
4 - 18
Z Table Offset
Part Setup 4 - 11
Z-Axis Position
APC diagnostics 5 - 20
ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 12
Z-Axis Servo 1 - 2
ZERO CAL (LENGTH) TOLERANCE field,
Probing Parameters 4 - 51
Zero Calibration field 4 - 22
Zero Calibration Mode 4 - 20
ZERO REF field 4 - 15
Zone field
Auto Mode Monitoring screen 5 - 29
DRO 4 - 11
ZOOM F3 softkey, graphics screen 4 - 67
ZOOM IN softkey
graphics screen 4 - 67
ZOOM OUT softkey
graphics screen 4 - 67

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Index — 15

- 16 Index 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill